GRAUPNER mx-16 ifs Programming Manual

mx-16iFS.2.gb
INTELLIGENT-FREQUENCY-SELECT
mx-16
3D-CYLINDERROTARY-SELECT
Programming Manual
Contents
General Notes
Safety Notes .................................................................. 3
Introduction .................................................................... 6
Description of radio control system ............................... 7
Power supplies ............................................................ 10
Adjusting stick length ................................................... 12
Opening the transmitter case ...................................... 12
Adjusting the dual-axis stick units................................ 13
Description of transmitter............................................. 14
Transmitter controls ............................................... 14
DSC (Direct Servo Control) ................................... 16
LCD screen ........................................................... 18
Buttons, function fields .......................................... 19
Adjusting screen contrast ...................................... 20
Position display, INC / DEC buttons ...................... 20
Servo display ......................................................... 20
Using the transmitter for the first time .......................... 22
Using the receiver for the first time .............................. 24
Expanded receiver programming mode ................ 26
Installation Notes ......................................................... 30
Definition of terms ....................................................... 32
Assigning switches and transmitter controls ................ 33
Digital trims .................................................................. 34
Fixed-wing model aircraft............................................. 36
Receiver socket assignment............................. 37/38
Model helicopters ........................................................ 40
Receiver socket assignment.................................. 41
Program description
Reserving a new memory............................................ 42
»Model memories« .................................................... 44
»Basic settings« (model)
Fixed-wing model aircraft ...................................... 46
Model helicopter .................................................... 50
2
Contents
»Servo settings« ........................................................ 56
»Transmitter control settings«
Fixed-wing model aircraft ...................................... 58
Model helicopter .................................................... 60
Throttle limit function ........................................ 62
Basic idle setting .............................................. 63
»D/R Expo«
Fixed-wing model aircraft ...................................... 66
Model helicopter .................................................... 68
»Phase Trim« (fixed-wing model aircraft).................... 70
What is a mixer? .......................................................... 72
»Fixed-wing mixers« ................................................. 72
»Helicopter mixers« .................................................. 78
Adjusting the throttle and collective pitch curves... 83
Auto-rotation settings ............................................ 86
General notes regarding freely programmable mixers 88
»Free mixers« ............................................................ 89
Examples............................................................... 92
»Swashplate mixers« ................................................ 93
Programming examples
Introduction .................................................................. 94
Fixed-wing model aircraft
First steps in programming a new model .............. 96
Including an electric power system ..................... 100
Electric motor and butterfly (crow)
with the Ch 1 stick ............................................... 102
Operating the timers ............................................ 105
Using flight phases .............................................. 106
Servos running in parallel .................................... 107
Model deltas and flying wings.................................... 108
F3A models ............................................................... 112
Model helicopters ...................................................... 116
Appendix
Trainer operations with the mx-16iFS ....................... 122
Appendix.................................................................... 124
Approved transmitter output stages and
national receiver settings ........................................... 126
Conformity declaration............................................... 127
Guarantee certificate ................................................. 131
The sole purpose of this manual is to provide information; it is subject to amendment without prior notification.
The GRAUPNER company accepts no responsibility or
liability for errors or inaccuracies which may be found in
the information contained in this manual.
Environmental protection
This symbol on the product, in the
operating instructions or the packaging
indicates that the product must not be
discarded via the normal household
refuse at the end of its useful life. Instead it must be taken to a collection
point for the recycling of electrical and electronic apparatus.
The materials can be re-used according to their identification code. You can make an important contribution to
the protection of our shared environment by recycling
old equipment and making use of its basic materials.
Dry and rechargeable batteries must be removed from
the device and taken to the appropriate collection point.
Please ask your local authority for the location of your
nearest waste disposal site.
Safety Notes
Please read carefully!
We all want you to have many hours of pleasure in our
mutual hobby of modelling, and safety is an important aspect
of this. It is absolutely essential that you read right through
these instructions and take careful note of all our safety
recommendations.
If you are a beginner to the world of radio-controlled model
aircraft, boats and cars, we strongly advise that you seek out
an experienced modeller in your field, and ask him or her for
help and advice.
If you ever dispose of this transmitter, these instructions must
be passed on to the new owner.
Application
This radio control system may only be used for the purpose
for which the manufacturer intended it, i. e. for operating
radio-controlled models which do not carry humans. No other
type of use is approved or permissible.
Safety notes
SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT
and
RADIO-CONTROLLED MODELS
ARE NOT PLAYTHINGS
Even small models can cause serious personal injury and
damage to property if they are handled incompetently, or if
an accident occurs due to the fault of others.
Technical problems in electrical and mechanical systems
can cause motors to rev up or burst into life unexpectedly,
with the result that parts may fly off at great speed, causing
considerable injury.
Short-circuits of all kinds must be avoided at all times.
Short-circuits can easily destroy parts of the radio control
system, but even more dangerous is the acute risk of fire and
explosion, depending on the circumstances and the energy
content of the batteries.
Aircraft and boat propellers, helicopter rotors, open gear-
boxes and all other rotating parts which are driven by a motor
or engine represent a constant injury hazard. Do not touch
these items with any object or part of your body. Remember
that a propeller spinning at high speed can easily slice off a
finger! Ensure that no other object can make contact with the
driven components.
Never stand in the primary danger zone, i. e. in the rotational
plane of the propeller or other rotating parts, when the motor
is running or the drive battery is connected.
Please note that a glowplug engine or electric motor could
burst into life accidentally if the receiving system is switched
on when you are transmitting the transmitter. To be on the
safe side, disconnect the fueltank or the flight battery.
Protect all electronic equipment from dust, dirt, damp, and
foreign bodies. Avoid subjecting the equipment to vibration
and excessive heat or cold. Radio control equipment should
only be used in “normal” ambient temperatures, i. e. within the
range -15°C to +55°C.
Avoid subjecting the equipment to shock and pressure.
Check the units at regular intervals for damage to cases
and leads. Do not re-use any item which is damaged or has
become wet, even after you have dried it out thoroughly.
Use only those components and accessories which we
expressly recommend. Be sure to use only genuine matching
GRAUPNER connectors of the same design with contacts of
the same material.
When deploying cables ensure that they are not under strain,
are not tightly bent (kinked) or broken. Avoid sharp edges, as
they can chafe through insulating materials.
Before you use the system, check that all connectors are
pushed home firmly. When disconnecting components, pull
on the connectors themselves – not on the wires.
It is not permissible to carry out any modifications to the RC
system components, as any such changes invalidate both
your operating licence and your insurance cover.
Installing the receiving system and deploying the receiver aerial
In a model aircraft the receiver must be packed in soft foam
and stowed behind a stout bulkhead, and in a model boat or
car it should be protected effectively from dust and spray.
The receiver must not make direct contact with the fuselage,
hull or chassis at any point, otherwise motor vibration and
landing shocks will be transmitted directly to it. When installing the receiving system in a model with a glowplug or petrol
engine, be sure to install all the components in well-protected
positions, so that no exhaust gas or oil residues can reach
the units and get inside them. This applies above all to the
ON / OFF switch, which is usually installed in the outer skin
of the model.
Secure the receiver in such a way that the aerial, servo leads
and switch harness are not under any strain. The receiver
aerial should be at least 5 cm away from all large metal parts
and any wiring which is not connected directly to the receiver.
This includes steel and carbon fibre components, servos,
electric motors, fuel pumps, cabling of all kinds, etc..
Ideally the receiver should be installed well away from any
other installed equipment in the model, but in an easily accessible position. Under no circumstances allow servo leads
to run close to the aerial, far less coiled round it!
Ensure that cables are fastened securely, so that they cannot
move close to the receiver aerial when the model is flying.
The orientation of the aerial is not critical, but mounting it
vertically inside the model is generally advantageous.
Installing the servos
Always install servos using the vibration-damping grommets
supplied. The rubber grommets provide some degree of
protection from mechanical shock and severe vibration.
Installing control linkages
The basic rule is that all linkages should be installed in such
Safety Notes
3
Safety Notes
a way that the pushrods move accurately, smoothly and
freely. It is particularly important that all servo output arms
can move to their full extent without fouling or rubbing on
anything, or being obstructed mechanically at any point in
their travel.
It is essential that you should be able to stop your motor at
any time. With a glow motor this is achieved by adjusting the
throttle so that the barrel closes completely when you move
the throttle stick and trim to their end-points.
Ensure that no metal parts are able to rub against each
other, e. g. when controls are operated, when parts rotate,
or when motor vibration affects the model. Metal-to-metal
contact causes electrical “noise” which can interfere with the
correct working of the receiver.
Directing the transmitter aerial
Transmitter field strength is at a minimum in an imaginary
line extending straight out from the transmitter aerial. It is
therefore fundamentally misguided to “point” the transmitter aerial at the model with the intention of obtaining good
reception.
When several radio control systems are in use on adjacent
channels, the pilots should always stand together in a loose
group. Pilots who insist on standing away from the group endanger their own models as well as those of the other pilots.
Pre-flight checking
Before you switch on the receiver, ensure that the throttle
stick is at the stop / idle end-point.
Always switch on the transmitter first,
and only then the receiver.
Always switch off the receiver first,
and only then the transmitter.
If you do not keep to this sequence, i. e. if the receiver is at
any time switched on when “its” transmitter is switched OFF,
then the receiver is wide open to signals from other trans-
4
Safety Notes
mitters and any interference, and may respond. The model
could then carry out uncontrolled movements, which could
easily result in personal injury or damage to property.
Please take particular care if your model is fitted with a
mechanical gyro: before you switch your receiver off, disconnect the power supply to ensure that the motor cannot run up
to high speed accidentally.
As it runs down, the gyro can generate such a high voltage that the receiver picks up apparently valid throttle
commands, and the motor could respond by unexpectedly bursting into life.
Range checking
Before every session check that the system works properly
in all respects, and has adequate range. In this regard it is
essential to read the notes on page 24 and the instructions
supplied with the receiver you are using.
When operating a model, i. e. when flying or driving, do not
operate the transmitter without the aerial fitted. Check that
the transmitter aerial is firmly seated.
Operating your model aircraft, helicopter, boat or car
Never fly directly over spectators or other pilots, and take
care at all times not to endanger people or animals. Keep
well clear of high-tension overhead cables. Never operate
your model boat close to locks and full-size vessels. Model
cars should never be run on public streets or motorways,
footpaths, public squares etc..
Checking the transmitter and receiver batteries
It is essential to stop using the radio control system and
recharge the batteries well before they are completely
discharged. In the case of the transmitter this means – at the
very latest – when the message “battery needs charging”
appears on the screen, and you hear an audible warning
signal.
It is vital to check the state of the batteries at regular intervals
– especially the receiver pack. When the battery is almost flat
you may notice the servos running more slowly, but it is by
no means safe to keep flying or running your model until this
happens. Always replace or recharge the batteries in good
time.
Keep to the battery manufacturer’s instructions, and don’t
leave the batteries on charge for longer than stated. Do not
leave batteries on charge unsupervised.
Never attempt to recharge dry cells, as they may explode.
Rechargeable batteries should always be recharged before
every session. When charging batteries it is important to
avoid short-circuits. Do this by first connecting the banana
plugs on the charge lead to the charger, taking care to maintain correct polarity. Only then connect the charge lead to the
transmitter or receiver battery.
Disconnect all batteries and remove them from your model if
you know you will not be using it in the near future.
Capacity and operating times
This rule applies to all forms of electrical power source: battery capacity is reduced every time you charge the pack. At
low temperatures capacity is greatly reduced, i. e. operating
times are shorter in cold conditions.
Frequent charging, and / or the use of maintenance programs, tends to cause a gradual reduction in battery capacity. We recommend that you check the capacity of all your
rechargeable batteries at least every six months, and replace
them if their performance has fallen off significantly.
Use only genuine GRAUPNER rechargeable batteries!
Suppressing electric motors
To a greater or lesser extent, all conventional electric motors produce sparks between commutator and brushes,
depending on the motor type; the sparking generates serious
interference to the radio control system. If an RC system is to
work correctly, it is therefore important to suppress the electric motors, and in electric-powered models it is essential that
every motor should be effectively suppressed. Suppressor
filters reliably eliminate such interference, and should always
be fitted where possible.
Please read the notes and recommendations supplied by the
motor manufacturer.
Refer to the main GRAUPNER FS catalogue or the Internet
website at www.graupner.de for more information on suppressor filters.
Servo suppressor filter for extension leads
Order No. 1040
Servo suppressor filters are required if you are obliged to use
long servo extension leads, as they eliminate the danger of
de-tuning the receiver. The filter is connected directly to the
receiver input. In very difficult cases a second filter can be
used, positioned close to the servo.
Using electronic speed controllers
The basic rule is that the electronic speed controller must be
chosen to suit the size of the electric motor it is required to
control.
There is always a danger of overloading and possibly damaging the speed controller, but you can avoid this by ensuring
that the controller’s current-handling capacity is at least half
the motor’s maximum stall current.
Particular care is called for if you are using a “hot” (i. e.
upgrade) motor, as any low-turn motor (small number of
turns on the winding) can draw many times its nominal current when stalled, and the high current will then burn out the
speed controller.
Electrical ignition systems
Ignition systems for internal combustion engines can also
produce interference, which has an adverse effect on the
working of the radio control system.
Electrical ignition systems should always be powered by a
separate battery – not the receiver battery.
Be sure to use effectively suppressed spark plugs and plug
caps, and shielded ignition leads.
Keep the receiving system an adequate distance away from
the ignition system.
Static charges
Lightning causes magnetic shock waves which can interfere
with the operation of a radio control transmitter even if the
thunderstorm actually occurs several kilometres away. For
this reason …
… cease flying operations immediately if you notice an
electrical storm approaching. Static charges through the
transmitter aerial can be life-threatening!
Caution
• In order to fulfil the FCC RF radiation regulations applicable to mobile transmitting apparatus, the equipment’s
aerial must be at least 20 cm from any person when the
system is in use. We therefore do not recommend using
the equipment at a closer range than 20 cm.
• Ensure that no other transmitter is closer than 20 cm from
your equipment, in order to avoid adverse effects on the
system’s electrical characteristics and radiation pattern.
• Before you use the radio control system, the receiver
must be programmed correctly to suit the country in
which you are operating. This is essential in order to fulfil
various FCC, ETSI and IC directives. Please refer to the
instructions provided with your receiver.
The receiver included with the system is set up at the factory for use in most European countries.
• Never attempt to program the transmitter RF module
whilst you are operating a model. For the same reason
do not touch any of the programming buttons on the RF
module at such times.
Care and maintenance
Don’t use cleaning agents, petrol, water or other solvents to
clean your equipment. If the case, the aerial etc. gets dirty,
simply wipe the surfaces clean with a soft dry cloth.
Components and accessories
As manufacturers, the company of GRAUPNER GmbH &
Co. KG recommends the exclusive use of components and
accessories which have been tested by GRAUPNER and approved for their capability, function and safety. If you observe
this rule, GRAUPNER accepts responsibility for the product.
GRAUPNER cannot accept liability for non-approved
components or accessories made by other manufacturers. It is not possible for GRAUPNER to assess every
individual item manufactured by other companies, so
we are unable to state whether such parts can be used
without incurring a safety risk.
Liability exclusion / Compensation
We at GRAUPNER are unable to ensure that you observe
the operating instructions, and are not in a position to influence the way you install, operate and maintain the radio
control system components. For this reason we are obliged
to refute all liability for loss, damage or costs which are incurred due to the incompetent or incorrect use and operation
of our products, or which are connected with such operation
in any way.
Unless otherwise prescribed by law, the obligation of the
GRAUPNER company to pay compensation is limited to the
invoice value of that quantity of GRAUPNER products which
was immediately and directly involved in the event in which
the damage occurred. This does not apply if GRAUPNER is
found to be subject to unlimited liability according to binding
legal regulation on account of deliberate or gross negligence.
Safety Notes
5
mx-16
– the latest generation of radio control technology
2.4 GHz iFS technology (iFS = intelligent Frequency
Select) with bi-directional communication between
transmitter and receiver represents a further milestone in
radio control technology. Several years of development
and a comprehensive programme of testing have led to
the introduction of this new Graupner | iFS system. The
development phase was accompanied by intensive practical testing which has confirmed the many advantages of
the overall design.
The Graupner/JR mc-24 computer radio control system
was introduced back in 1997, and the mx-16iFS retains
many of its features, refined to meet the needs of the
beginner. Although the mx-16iFS is intended primarily for
the inexperienced user, it is still capable of controlling all
current types of model, from fixed-wing model aeroplanes
and helicopters to model boats and cars.
In the area of fixed-wing models and helicopters it is
often necessary to employ complex mixer functions for
the control surfaces or the swashplate actuation system.
Computer technology enables you to activate a vast
range of functions to cope with special model requirements – just by pressing a button. With the mx-16iFS
all you do is select the appropriate model type, and the
software then presents you automatically with the appropriate mixer and coupling functions. This means that
the transmitter requires no additional modules in order to
implement complex coupled functions, and you can forget
all about old-fashioned mechanical mixers in the model.
The mx-16iFS provides an extremely high level of safety
and reliability in use.
The mx-16iFS offers twelve model memories, each of
which can store model settings for different flight phases.
Individual phases can be called up in flight simply by
operating a switch, so that you can try out various settings
6
Introduction
quickly and without risk. This can be for test purposes or
for varying parameters for different phases of flight.
The large graphic screen makes operating the transmitter
a simple, intuitive process. Mixers and other functions can
be displayed in graphic form, and this is extraordinarily
helpful.
The beginner soon becomes familiar with the wide range
of functions available thanks to the clear, logically arranged program structure. Adjustments are made using
just three buttons on the left, together with the rotary
cylinder to the right of the high-contrast screen, and in this
way you very quickly learn how to make full use of all the
options you need, according to your experience in handling radio-controlled models.
The digital modulation of the “intelligent frequency select”
process provides the extremely high servo travel resolution of 65,536 steps, guaranteeing ultra-fine control. In
theory the Graupner | iFS system permits the simultaneous use of up to 120 models, although in practice the
mixed operation of different technical systems in the 2.4
GHz band – as required by the approval regulations – reduces this number considerably. Generally, however, it will
always be possible to operate even more models simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz band than on the 35 / 40 MHz
frequency bands which we have used to date. However,
the actual limiting factor – as it has always been – is likely
to remain the size of the (air-) space available. The simple
fact that no frequency control procedure is necessary
equates to an enormous gain in safety, especially at flying
sites such as gliding slopes where groups of pilots may
be distributed over a large area, with nobody in overall
control.
The XZ-P1 iFS programming module, which is available
as an optional accessory, provides a simple method of
programming the iFS RF transmitter module and the
iFS receiver using a PC. Variable parameters include
the output power of the RF module, the receiver output
sequence and the Fail-Safe settings for each channel.
Alternatively these functions can be programmed using
push-buttons.
This manual describes each menu in detail, and also
provides dozens of useful tips, notes and programming
examples to complement the basic information. More
general modelling terms, such as Transmitter controls,
Dual-Rates, Butterfly (Crow) and many others, are all
explained in the manual.
The Appendix contains comprehensive information on the
Trainer (teacher / pupil) system. The manual concludes
with a table of the transmitter output powers and national
receiver settings approved for use in individual European
countries, copies of the Conformity Declaration and the
transmitter’s Guarantee Certificate.
Please read the safety notes and the technical information. We recommend that you read right through the
instructions with great care, and check all the functions
as described in the text. This can be carried out simply by
connecting servos to the supplied receiver, and watching
their response as you program the transmitter. This is the
quickest method of becoming familiar with the essential
procedures and functions of the mx-16iFS.
Always handle your radio-controlled model with a responsible attitude to avoid endangering yourself and others.
All of us in the GRAUPNER team wish you every success
and many years of pleasure with your mx-16iFS, which
is an excellent example of the latest generation of radio
control systems.
Kirchheim-Teck, March 2009
mx-16
COMPUTER SYSTEM
Eight-channel radio control system exploiting Graupner | iFS technology (intelligent frequency select)
High-technology micro-computer radio control
system with new high-speed single-chip micro-computer, flash memory and 10-bit A/D converter.
A computer radio control system with twelve model
memories, carefully optimised and incorporating
top-level technology.
Modern computer system incorporating Graupner
2.4 GHz iFS technology for unbeatable reliability.
Bi-directional communication between transmitter
and receiver. Simplified, straightforward programming technique. The high-contrast graphic screen
provides an efficient means of monitoring battery
voltage, modulation, model type, model name, model
memory number, set-up data, throttle and collective
pitch curves and model operating time.
• Micro-computer radio control system incorporating
the latest 2.4 GHz Graupner | iFS technology
• Bi-directional communication between transmitter
and receiver
• Ultra-fast transmission rate for extremely fast system
response, plus 16-bit encoding for extremely high
resolution of 65,536 steps per control channel
• Virtual elimination of interference caused by electric
motors, servos and electrical charge effects (metalto-metal noise)
• Removable folding stub aerial
• Methods of operation and programming based on the
proven concepts of the mc-19 to mc-24
• High-contrast graphic screen for outstanding control
of set-up parameters, operating modes, timers and
operating voltage
• Eight control functions with extremely convenient,
simplified method of assigning controls for auxiliary
functions such as switches and proportional controls
• Unrestricted assignment of all switches to switched
functions simply by operating the appropriate switch
• Twelve model memories for storing all model-specific
programming and set-up parameters
• The latest back-up system, requiring no Lithium
battery
• Standard equipment includes four switches (of which
one is a three-position type), one momentary button, one analogue control, two digital controls; freely
programmable for extreme flexibility
• Function encoder with rotary cylinder and three
momentary buttons for simplified programming and
accurate set-up
• Convenient mode selector provides simple method
Description of radio control system
7
mx-16
COMPUTER SYSTEM
Eight-channel radio control system exploiting Graupner | iFS technology (intelligent frequency select)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8
of changing the stick mode (modes 1 - 4, e. g. throttle
right / throttle left). When you change modes, all the
affected settings are switched at the same time.
Graphical servo display provides a straightforward
overview of the servo set-up, and a swift method of
checking servo travels
Receiver output swap
Fixed-wing menu for: 1 AIL, 2 AIL, 2 AIL + 2 FLAP,
V-tail, delta / flying wing, two elevator servos
Fixed-wing mixer: diff aile, diff.flaps, ail ¼ rudd, ail
¼ flaps, brake ¼ elev, brake ¼ flap, brake ¼ aile,
elev ¼ flap, elev ¼ aile, flap ¼ elev, flap ¼ aile
and diff. reduction
Heli menu: 1-point, 2-point, 3-point and 4-point linkages (1 servo, 2 servo, 3sv(2roll), 3sv(2nick (pitchaxis)), 4 SV (90°))
Servo travel adjustment ±150% for all servo channels, variable for each end-point separately (Single
Side Servo Throw)
Sub-trim for fine-tuning the neutral position of all
servos
Servo reverse, programmable for all servos
EXPO / DUAL-RATE system, separately variable, can
be switched in-flight
Mixer functions:
Aileron differential mixer, butterfly mixer, flaperon
mixer and three freely programmable mixers
Convenient swashplate programs for model helicopters
Programmable Fail-Safe function in receiver with
“hold-mode” and “move to preset position” function,
variable separately for each servo channel
Stopwatch / count-down timer with alarm function
Description of radio control system
• Model memory copy function
• Integral DSC socket for use with flight simulators and
Trainer systems
The sets contain
Specification of mx-16iFS transmitter
Specification of XR-16ifs receiver
Order No. 23000:
mx-16iFS micro-computer synthesizer transmitter with
integral 8NH-2000 TX NiMH battery (type may differ),
XR-16ifs 2.4 GHz bi-directional receiver, one DS 8077
servo, switch harness
Frequency band
2,4 … 2,4835 GHz
Intelligent Frequency Select
Operating voltage
4,8 … 6 V
Current drain approx.
70 mA
Transmitter output
power
Please refer to the table
on page 126 for details of
approved output powers in
individual countries.
Frequency band
2,4 … 2,4835 GHz
National settings
mx-16iFS micro-computer synthesizer transmitter with
Control functions
8 functions, 4 with trims
integral 8NH-2000 TX NiMH battery (type may differ),
XR-16ifs 2.4 GHz bi-directional receiver
Servo resolution
65,536 steps (16 bit)
The approved national settings are listed in the table
on page 126, and also in the
instructions supplied with the
receiver.
Temperature range
-15 … +55°C
Servo resolution
Aerial
SMA connector, folding,
removable
65,536 steps (16 bit)
servo signal accuracy ±10 ns
Aerial
Length approx. 3 cm, completely enclosed in receiver
case
Servo functions
8
Temperature range
-15° … +55° C
Dimensions approx.
54 x 29 x 14 mm
Weight approx.
19 g
Order No. 23000.99:
Please refer to the table on page 126 for details of approved transmitter power outputs in individual countries.
Operating voltage
9,6 … 12 V
Current drain approx.
185 mA
Dimensions approx.
190 x 195 x 85 mm
Weight approx.
850 g with Transmitter Battery
Accessories
Order No. Description
1121
Neckstrap, 20 mm wide
70
Neckstrap, 30 mm wide
3097
Wind-shield for hand-held transmitter
See page 124 for mx-16iFS Trainer leads
Replacement parts
Order No. Description
23050
iFS transmitter aerial
Description of radio control system
9
Operating Notes
Transmitter power supply
The mx-16iFS transmitter is fitted as standard with a
high-capacity 8NH-2000 TX NiMH battery (Order No.
2498.8TX) (type may differ). When delivered, the standard rechargeable battery is not charged.
When you are using the transmitter you can monitor
the battery voltage on the LCD screen. If the voltage of
the transmitter battery falls below a certain point, you
will hear an audible warning signal. The screen then
displays a message reminding you that the transmitter
battery needs to be recharged.
0:00
GRAUBELE
batterStop
y
0:00
#01
needsFlug
charging
9
«normal »
9.1V
0:45h
K78
IFS
Always recharge the transmitter battery in good time.
When you see this message, cease operations immediately and recharge the transmitter battery.
Charging the transmitter battery
The rechargeable transmitter battery can be charged
via the charge socket fitted to the right-hand side of the
case. Leave the battery inside the transmitter for charging, to avoid premature damage to the internal battery
socket.
The transmitter must be switched “OFF” for the whole
period of the charge process. Never switch on the
transmitter when it is still connected to the charger; even
a very brief interruption in the process can cause the
charge voltage to rise to the point where the transmitter
is immediately damaged. For this reason check carefully
that all connectors are secure, and are making really
good contact.
10
Operating Notes
Polarity of the mx-16iFS charge socket
Commercially available battery charge leads produced
by other manufacturers are often made up with the opposite polarity. For this reason use genuine GRAUPNER
charge leads exclusively.
Charging the transmitter battery using an automatic
charger
The transmitter is designed as standard for use with
automatic battery chargers. However, this requires care
on your part:
The transmitter charge socket is not protected
against short-circuit and / or reversed polarity. It
is therefore essential to use the correct procedure
when connecting the charge lead: first connect the
banana plugs on the charge lead to the charger, and
only then connect the other end of the lead to the
transmitter charge socket. When the charge lead is
connected to the transmitter, never allow the bare
ends of the plugs to touch! To avoid damage to the
transmitter, the charge current must never exceed 1
A. If necessary, limit the current on the charger itself.
Charging the transmitter battery using a standard
charger
It is also possible to charge the transmitter battery
using a charger with no automatic termination (cut-off)
circuit. The basic rule in this case is to charge the battery for fourteen hours, assuming that it is initially flat.
The charge current should be one tenth of the capacity
printed on the battery. This means 200 mA for the standard transmitter battery. However, you are responsible for
terminating the charge process manually if you use a
standard charger …
Removing the transmitter battery
The first step in removing the transmitter battery is to
open the battery compartment cover in the back of the
case. This is accomplished by pushing it in the direction
of the arrow; it can then be lifted off:
Disconnect the plug at the end of the
transmitter battery lead by pulling
carefully on the lead, or by engaging
a finger nail behind the lug on the
top of the connector. However, don’t
pull the plug down or up; keep it as
parallel as possible to the surface of
the transmitter.
red
brown or
black
Transmitter charge
plug polarity
Battery timer, bottom left corner of the screen
This timer displays the cumulative operating time of the
transmitter since the last time the transmitter battery
was charged.
This timer is automatically reset to “0:00” when the
transmitter detects that the voltage of the transmitter
battery is significantly higher than the last time it was
switched on, e. g. as a result of a charge process.
GRAUBELE
#01
11.3V
0:00h
0:00
stop
0:00
flt
«normal »
K78
IFS
Note:
Please refer to the main GRAUPNER FS catalogue or
visit the Internet site at www.graupner.de for full details
of batteries, chargers, measuring equipment and battery
monitor units.
Charging the receiver battery
The charge lead, Order No. 3021, can be connected
directly to the NC receiver battery for charging. If the
battery is installed in a model and you have installed
one of the following switch harnesses: Order No. 3046,
3934 or 3934.1 or 3934.3, the battery can be charged
via the separate charge socket, or the charge socket
which is built into the switch. The switch on the switch
harness must be left at the “OFF” position for charging..
Polarity of receiver battery connector
General notes on battery charging
• Observe the recommendations provided by the
charger manufacturer and the battery manufacturer
at all times.
• Keep to the maximum permissible charge current
stated by the battery manufacturer.
• The maximum charge current for the transmitter
battery is 1.5 A. Limit the charge current to this value
on the charger.
• If you wish to charge the transmitter battery at a
current higher than 1.5 A, you must first remove the
pack from the transmitter, otherwise you risk damaging the circuit board through overloading the conductor tracks, and / or overheating the battery.
• Carry out a series of test charges to ensure that the
automatic charge termination circuit works correctly
with your battery. This applies in particular if you are
using an automatic charger designed for NiCd batteries to recharge the standard NiMH battery.
• You may need to adjust the Delta Peak trigger voltage, if your charger provides this option.
• Do not discharge the battery or carry out a battery
maintenance program via the integral charge socket.
The charge socket is not suitable for this application.
• Always connect the charge lead to the charger first,
and only then to the transmitter or receiver battery.
Observing this rule eliminates the danger of accidental short-circuits between the bare contacts of the
charge lead plugs.
• If the battery becomes hot when on charge, it is time
to check the pack’s condition. Replace it if necessary,
or reduce the charge current.
• Never leave batteries unsupervised when on
charge.
Recommended battery chargers (optional accessories)
220 V mains conn.
12 V DC connect.
NC
NiMH
LiPo
Lead-ac.
Integral charge. lead
Receiver power supply
A wide range of rechargeable four-cell and five-cell NiMH
batteries varying in capacity is available for use as the
receiver power supply. If you are using digital servos we
recommend that you use a five-cell (6 V) pack of generous capacity. If your model is fitted with a mixture of
digital and analogue servos, it is important to check the
maximum permissible operating voltage of all the types.
The PRX unit, Order No. 4136, provides a stabilised
receiver power supply with a user-variable voltage from
one or two receiver batteries; see Appendix.
For reasons of safety battery boxes or dry cells should
never be used.
For this reason you should make it a standard part
of your routine to check the state of your batteries
at regular intervals. Don’t wait until you notice
the servos running more slowly than usual before
recharging the packs.
Suitable for
the following
battery types
Order
No.
Description
6409
6410
6411
6412
6414
6419
6427
6442
6444
6455
Ultramat 6
Ultramat 10
Ultramat 8
Ultramat 12
Ultramat 14
Ultramat 5
Multilader 3
Ultramat 17
Ultra Duo Plus 50
Multilader 7E
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
To recharge the mx-16iFS system you will also need the transmitter
charge lead, Order No. 3022, and the receiver battery charge lead,
Order No. 3021, unless stated otherwise in the table.
Please refer to the main GRAUPNER FS catalogue or visit the Internet
site at www.graupner.de for the full range of chargers, and details of
those listed above.
Disposing of dry cells and rechargeable batteries
Never dispose of exhausted batteries in the household
refuse. As end-user you are legally required (by the “Battery Regulation”) to return old and exhausted batteries.
They should and must be taken to your local toxic waste
collection point so that the materials can be re-used or
re-cycled. Alternatively they can also be returned to any
retail outlet where batteries are sold.
Operating Notes 11
Betriebshinweise
Adjusting stick length
Both sticks are infinitely variable in length over a broad
range, enabling you to set them to suit your personal
preference.
Loosen the locking screw using a 2 mm allen key, then
screw the stick top in or out to shorten or extend it.
Tighten the grubscrew again carefully to lock the set
length.
Locking screw
Loosen
Tighten
Opening the transmitter case
Please read the following notes carefully before you
open the transmitter. If you have no experience in such
matters, we recommend that you ask your nearest
GRAUPNER Service Centre to carry out the work for
you.
The transmitter should only be opened in the following
cases:
• When a self-neutralising stick needs to be converted
to non-neutralising action, or a non-neutralising stick
to a self-neutralising action.
• If you wish to adjust the stick centring spring tension.
Before opening the transmitter check that it is switched
off (move Power switch to “OFF”).
There is no need to remove the transmitter battery.
However, if you leave it in place be sure not to switch the
transmitter on (“ON” position). If you wish to remove the
transmitter battery, please read the section on page 10.
Locate the six recessed screws on the back on the
transmitter, and undo them using a PH1-size crosspoint screwdriver (see drawing right). Hold the two case
sections together with your hand, and turn the unit over
to allow these six screws to fall out onto the table. Now
carefully raise the case back and fold it open to the left,
as if you were opening a book.
C A UT I O N
A two-core lead connects the case back to the transmitter electronics in the front section. Please take
great care not to damage this cable!
Important:
• Do not modify the transmitter circuit in any way,
as this invalidates your guarantee and official ap-
12
Operating Notes
proval for the system.
• Do not touch any part of the circuit boards with
any metal object. Avoid touching the contacts
with your fingers.
• Never switch the transmitter on while the case is
open.
Please note the following points when closing the
transmitter:
• Make sure that no cables are jammed between the
transmitter case sections when you close the back.
• Ensure that the DSC socket engages in its mounting.
• Check that the two case sections fit together flush all
round before fitting the retaining screws. Never force
the two case components together.
• Fit the case screws in the existing threads, and tighten them gently. Over-tightening them will strip the
threads in the plastic.
Location of the transmitter case screws
Changing the stick mode
Either or both sticks can be converted from self-neutralising to non self-neutralising action: start by opening the
transmitter as described on the previous page.
The procedure for changing the default stick mode setting is as follows:
1. Use a pair of tweezers to disconnect the spring from
the centring lever on the stick whose mode you wish
to change. If you are not sure, move the appropriate
stick to make it obvious. Raise the lever and disconnect it.
2. Locate the ratchet spring and
fix it to the plastic pillar using
the (black) self-tapping screw
supplied. You can now set the
strength of the ratchet spring on
the side of the hexagonal bush by
screwing the M3 screw in or out. Brass
bush
3. Check that the stick works as you
prefer, then close the transmitter
case once more.
Resetting the spring to “self-neutralising” action
Open the transmitter as already described.
1. Disconnect and remove the ratchet spring: see picture left.
2. Now re-connect the (previously removed) centring spring to the side of the stick where the ratchet
spring was located.
3. First loosen the stick centring spring adjuster screw
slightly – see picture right – and then draw a length
of thin thread through the upper loop of the spring –
but don’t tie it. Now use a pair of tweezers to connect
the spring to the bottom loop of the adjustment system, and then engage the top end of the spring to the
centring lever using the thread. Once the spring is
correctly fitted, the thread can be removed again.
4. The tension of the stick centring spring can be adjusted as describedd in the next section.
Stick centring spring tension
The stick centring force can be adjusted to suit the
pilot’s personal preference. The adjustment system is
located adjacent to the stick centring spring. Rotate the
adjuster screw using a cross-point screwdriver until the
spring tension feels right to you:
• Turn to the right = harder spring tension;
• Turn to the left = softer spring tension.
Operating Notes
13
Description of transmitter
Transmitter controls
Attaching the transmitter neckstrap
You will find a strap lug mounted in the centre of the
front face of the mx-16iFS transmitter, as shown in the
drawing on the right. This lug is positioned in such a
way that the transmitter is perfectly balanced even when
suspended from a neckstrap.
Order No. 1121
Neckstrap, 20 mm wide
Order No. 70
Neckstrap, 30 mm wide
Aerial with folding / swivelling joint
Neckstrap lug
CTRL 5: INC / DEC buttons*
CTRL 6: INC / DEC buttons*
SW 3: two-position switch
Carry handle
Button: SW 4 / PB 8
SW 2: two-position switch
Important note:
In the transmitter’s standard form any servos connected
to the receiver can initially only be operated using the
dual-axis sticks. For maximum flexibility, all the other
transmitter controls (CTRL 5 ... 7, SW 1 ... 7) are “free”
in software terms, and can be assigned to any channels
you like, enabling you to set up the system to suit your
personal preference or the requirements of a particular
model. This is carried out in the »contr set.« menu, as
described on pages 58 and 60.
SW 6 / 7: three-position switch
SW 1: two-position switch
CTRL 7: rotary proportional control
Left-hand stick unit
Right-hand stick unit
Trim buttons
Trim buttons
ON / OFF switch
Input buttons
*
14
INC/DEC buttons (CTRL 5 and 6
Each time you press the button the servo travel changes by 1% of
the set maximum; the system works as follows:
INC – in the positive direction;
DEC – in the negative direction.
The button position is also stored separately for each flight phase.
Description of transmitter: transmitter controls
Rotary cylinder
LCD screen
For your notes
15
DSC
Transmitter back panel
Direct Servo Control
Case screw
Case screw
Case screw
Case screw
Transmitter battery charge socket
Battery compartment cover
DSC socket for connection to flight simulators, Trainer lead and Diagnosis (closed
loop) lead (see right-hand column).
Case screw
Case screw
Caution
The battery lead is polarised,
i. e. it can only be plugged in
one way round. Don’t use force
when disconnecting the battery
connector!
Right vertical
Right horizontal
Do not touch the transmitter circuit board!
Adjusting the centring spring force
Do not touch the transmitter circuit board!
16
Description of transmitter: back panel
Left horizontal
Left vertical
The original function of this socket was for “Direct Servo
Control”, and that’s why the abbreviation is still in use.
However, for technical reasons “direct servo control” is
no longer possible with iFS systems using the diagnosis
lead.
The mx-16iFS transmitter’s standard two-pole socket is
now used as a Trainer (buddy box) socket (Teacher or
Pupil), and as an interface for flight simulators.
For the DSC connection to work you must check the
following:
1. Carry out any adjustments required in the appropriate menus:
See page 122 for information on setting up the mx16iFS transmitter to work as part of a Trainer system.
2. ALWAYS leave the transmitter’s On / Off switch in
the “OFF” position when using a flight simulator and
when using the transmitter as a Pupil unit in a Trainer system, for only in this position is the RF section
of the transmitter module switched off (no RF signal)
even when the DSC lead is plugged in. At the same
time the transmitter’s current drain is reduced slightly.
3. Connect the appropriate two-pole barrel connector to the DSC socket on the back of the transmitter
(switched off).
This renders the transmitter ready for use, and the
LCD screen operates. At the same time the letters
“DSC” appear to the left of the “iFS” symbol on the
screen.
4. Connect the other end of the connecting lead to the
appropriate apparatus, taking into account the operating instructions supplied with that equipment.
Important:
Ensure that all connectors are firmly seated in
their sockets.
Note regarding flight simulators:
The range of flight simulators available commercially
is now very wide, and you may find that it is necessary
to swap over certain contacts at the battery plug or
the DSC module. This work must be carried out by a
GRAUPNER Service Centre.
Description of transmitter: back panel
17
LCD screen and operating buttons
Visual display of trim lever positions; alternatively – if the
rotary cylinder is held pressed in – display of the current
settings of the two INC / DEC buttons (CTRL 5 + 6).
Model name
Model type display
(fixed-wing / helicopter)
Error in Trainer mode
Throttle stick dangerously high
Operating voltage
inadequate
no
student
signal
t h ro t t l e
too
high !
battery
needs
ch a rg i n g
Stopwatch in min : sec
(count-up / count-down)
Model memory 1 … 12
Flight timer in min : sec
(count-up / count-down)
ENTER = confirm
Rotary cylinder
(rotate and press to
alter values)
ESC =
interrupt / back
CLEAR =
erase or reset to
default value
Battery voltage
(if voltage falls below a particular value a warning display
appears – see images at top right – and an audible warning
signal sounds)
Battery operating time since
last charge process, in hr : min
18
Description of transmitter: LCD screen and operating buttons
Modulation type
M
Iff CTRL 5 or 6 is opera
operated,
ated
or the rotary cylinder is
pressed, the transmitter control position is superimposed
F
Flight
phase name
transition between flight
tra
phases using switch
ph
Controlling the “Data Terminal”
Input buttons and basic method of using the rotary cylinder
Function fields
ENTER, ESC, CLEAR
Buttons to the left of the screen
• ENTER
Pressing ENTER takes you from the basic display
(which appears when you switch the transmitter on)
to the menu select screen. You can also call up a selected menu by pressing ENTER.
• ESC
Pressing the ESC button returns you step by step
within the function select system, taking you right
back to the basic display. If you make a change in the
meantime, the change is retained.
• CLEAR
Resets a changed parameter value in the active input
field to the default value.
SEL, STO, CLR, SYM, ASY,
,
Function fields
In the bottom line of the screen function fields appear
which can be selected using the rotary cylinder; these
fields vary according to the menu selected.
Rotary cylinder to the right of the screen
The rotary cylinder is responsible for several tasks:
1. If it is not pressed, it selects the desired menu from
the multi-function list.
When you have called up a menu point, the rotary
cylinder is also used to alter already entered values
using the function fields (see right column), which
appear in inverse video (light characters on a dark
background).
In the ‘not pressed’ state you will obtain better grip on the cylinder by rotating it at the bottom end.
2. If it is pressed in, you can use it to switch between
the individual lines within a menu.
In the ‘pressed’ state you will obtain better grip
on the cylinder by rotating it at the top end.
3. A brief press on the rotary cylinder at the top
end of the cylinder changes the input field or
confirms an input.
4. At the transmitter’s basic display the screen
contrast can be adjusted with the rotary cylinder pressed in; see next double page.
5. At the transmitter’s basic display the two central –
vertical – trim displays show the positions of the two
INC / DEC controls (CTRL 5 and 6) for as long
as the rotary cylinder is held pressed in; see
next double page.
6. A brief press on the rotary cylinder takes you
from the transmitter’s basic display to the Servo
display; see next double page.
SEL
STO CLR SYM ASY
A function field is activated by pressing the rotary
cylinder.
Function fields
• SEL select
•
Switch symbol field
(assigning switches of all kinds)
• STO store (e. g. transmitter control position)
• CLR clear: reset to default value
• SYM adjust values symmetrically
• ASY adjust values asymmetrically
•
Switch to second page (next menu) within a
menu
Description of transmitter: buttons and rotary cylinder
19
Adjusting screen contrast
Position display
Servo display
INC / DEC button, CTRL 5 + 6
The contrast of the mx-16iFS transmitter’s LCD screen
is variable, to ensure that you can read the information
clearly in all weathers and at all temperatures.
Adjust the control by holding the rotary cylinder pressed
in and rotating it when the transmitter screen is showing
the basic display: turn it to left or right as required:
GRAUBELE
#01
11.3V
0:00h
0:00
stop
0:00
flt
«normal »
K78
IFS
GRAUBELE
#01
11.3V
0:00h
0:00
stop
0:00
flt
«normal »
K78
IFS
Holding the rotary cylinder pressed in while you are at
the transmitter’s basic display calls up a visual display of
the current positions of the two INC / DEC buttons (CTRL
5 + 6). This display disappears again when you release
the rotary cylinder. At the same time a small symbol appears on the left, adjacent to the channel display:
Pressing the rotary cylinder at the transmitter’s basic
display calls up a visual representation of the current
servo positions on the transmitter screen.
When you hold the rotary cylinder pressed in, the position display on the basic transmitter screen (consisting
of the two central vertical bars) also changes: it switches
from a display of the current trim position to the current position of the INC / DEC buttons, CTRL 5 + 6, but
only for as long as you hold the rotary cylinder pressed
in. Since the position of these two controls is stored
separately for reach flight phase, you will need to switch
between the individual flight phases if you wish to see
the positions in those phases.
As you would expect, the left-hand bar represents the
position of the INC / DEC button CTRL 6, located to
the left of the aerial base, and the right-hand bar shows
the position of CTRL 5 (however, both horizontal bars
continue to show the current position of the corresponding transmitter stick trim levers):
This display shows the current position of every servo
in the form of a bar diagram, taking into account the
transmitter control and servo settings, the Dual Rate /
Expo functions, the inter-action of all active mixers etc..
The display is accurate, and covers the range -150%
to +150% of normal travel. 0% means the exact centre
position. This allows you to check your settings quickly
without even having to switch the receiver on. However,
this does not mean that you don’t need to bother checking all the programming steps on the model; you must
do this carefully before operating it for the first time, as
this is the only reliable method of picking up and correcting errors.
GRAUBELE
#01
9.9V
3:33h
0:00
stop
0:00
flt
«normal »
K78 IFS
As soon as you release the rotary cylinder, the screen
reverts to a display of the current position of the four trim
levers of the two dual-axis stick units.
20
Description of transmitter: screen contrast, position display, servo display
1
3
5
7
0
0%
0
0%
0
0%
+ 100%
2
4
6
8
0
0%
0
0%
0
0%
–100%
For fixed-wing model aircraft the display shows the
information arranged in the following way:
Bar 1 = Throttle / brake servo
Bar 2 = Aileron or left aileron
Bar 3 = Elevator
Bar 4 = Rudder
Bar 5 = Right aileron
Bar 6 = (Left) camber-changing flap / free channel
Bar 7 = Right camber-changing flap / free channel
Bar 8 = Free channel /second elevator servo
… and for model helicopters:
Bar 1 = Collective pitch or roll (2) or pitch-axis (2) servo
Bar 2 = Roll (1) servo
Bar 3 = Pitch-axis (1) servo
Bar 4 = Tail rotor servo (gyro)
Bar 5 = Pitch axis (2) servo / free channel
Bar 6 = Throttle servo / speed controller
Bar 7 = Gyro gain / free channel
Bar 8 = Speed governor / free channel
Note:
Please note, however, that the servo display always
refers to the original servo sequence, i. e. if you swap
over the receiver outputs using the sub-menu “receiv
out” in the »base sett.« menu (see pages 49 or 53), the
display does not reflect this. The same applies if you
use the receiver interchange facility (see page 26, or the
instructions supplied with the receiver).
Description of transmitter: screen contrast, position display, servo display
21
Using the transmitter for the first time
Preliminary notes, programming the iFS RF module
For more information please visit the Internet site at www.graupner.de)
Preliminary notes
In theory the Graupner | iFS system permits the simultaneous use of up to 120 models, although in practice
the mixed operation of different technical systems in
the 2.4 GHz band – as required by the approval regulations – reduces this number considerably. Generally,
however, it will always be possible to operate even
more models simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz band than
on the 35 / 40 MHz frequency bands which we have
used to date. However, the actual limiting factor – as
it has always been – is likely to remain the size of the
(air-) space available. The simple fact that no frequency
control procedure is necessary – a great convenience in
itself – equates to an enormous gain in safety, especially
at flying sites where groups of pilots may be distributed
over a large area, with nobody in overall control.
Battery charged?
When you take receipt of your transmitter, the battery
will be in the discharged state, so you must first charge
it as described on pages 10 / 11. If you do not do this,
the battery will soon fall below
b atter y
the pre-set threshold voltage,
n
eed s
and you will see and hear a
ch arg in g
warning signal to remind you to
recharge it.
Aerial fitted?
For normal operations (flying or driving a model) ensure
that the iFS aerial is screwed in place and firmly seated.
However, hand-tight is quite sufficient – don’t use a tool!
22
Using the transmitter for the first time
Switching the transmitter on
When you switch the transmitter on, the Status LED on
the Graupner | iFS RF module (on the back of the transmitter) briefly lights up orange, then red for a second
before it starts flashing red. Red flashes mean that there
is no connection with a Graupner | iFS receiver. When
the connection is made, the Status LED constantly
flashes green.
The receiver supplied in the set is bound to the transmitter at the factory; the mx-16iFS transmitter can operate
up to eight servos in conjunction with this unit.
If telemetry sensors are connected to the receiver, the
Status LED flashes orange when telemetry data is
received (this function is in preparation).
IMPORTANT NOTE:
• In the interest of maximum possible flexibility,
control channels 5 … 8 are not assigned to transmitter controls by default; this also helps to eliminate the danger of inadvertently using them incorrectly. For the same reason virtually all the
mixers are inactive by default. This means that in
its standard form the transmitter can only control
servos connected to receiver output sockets 1 …
4 using the primary dual-axis sticks. In contrast,
any servos connected to receiver sockets 5 …
max. 8 remain fixed at their centre position. This
situation only changes when you have assigned
a control element to the desired control functions
5 … 8 in the »contr set.« menu; see page 58 or 60.
• The basic procedure for programming a new
model memory can be found on page 42, and in
the programming examples starting on page 96.
Expanded programming mode for the RF module
This mode enables the user to alter a number of characteristics and parameters. During this procedure
any Graupner | iFS receiver which has already been
“bound” to the associated Graupner | iFS RF module MUST be switched off before the transmitter is
switched on.
This is the procedure for switching to the expanded
programming mode: locate the programming button on
the RF module and hold it pressed in while you switch
the transmitter on. Hold the button pressed in until the
Status LED first goes out, then glows green and finally
glows a constant red (this process takes about seven
seconds). Release the button: you are now in expanded
programming mode.
Note:
If the LED glows orange, you have held the button
pressed in for too long. (In so doing you have activated
a function which is intended for the X1-PZ iFS programming adapter.) If this should happen, repeat the
procedure.
The individual set-up options can now be selected in
sequence with brief presses of the programming button.
The display of the Status LED changes in accordance
with the following table. You can quit the “expanded
programming mode” again at any time simply by switching the transmitter off.
Status LED
Function
Constant RED
Output power adjustment
Constant GREEN
Hopping mode adjustment
(further set-up facilities are in preparation)
Setting the output power stage
(value range: 1 … 5)
With the LED glowing a constant red, hold the programming button pressed in until the LED goes out. The LED
now flashes green slowly to indicate the currently set
power output: 1 x flash for stage 1, … 5 x flash for stage
5. At the end of the flashing sequence you can set a
new value within a period of five seconds.
To change the output power, press the programming
button briefly a specific number of times, i. e. corresponding to the output power stage: one press for stage
1, … five presses for stage 5. As an example: if you wish
to set the output power to the lowest value, you must
press the programming button once briefly; if you wish
to set output stage “3”, press the button three times in
rapid succession. Every button-press is confirmed by the
LED glowing red briefly.
If you do not press the programming button within five
seconds, or if you enter an invalid value, the LED briefly
flashes alternately red / green (error indicator); in this
case the set value is not altered. Once you have successfully set a new “value”, the LED confirms this by
flashing green / red / orange in rapid succession. In
either case this procedure takes you back to the start of
the expanded programming mode, where you can select
the set-up options.
The power output stages stated in the table below
MUST be observed, to ensure that the system fulfils the
legal requirements of the country concerned:
Country
Approved power settings
North America and
Australia
Hopping mode 1 … 3
1…5
Output stages
Country
Approved power settings
Japan and Europe
Hopping mode 1:
1…2
Output stages
Hopping mode 4 + 5:
1…5
Output stages
Note:
• The Status LED of Graupner | iFS receivers glows
green in normal use if the output power is set to a
stage higher than 1, and red if output stage 1 is set.
• If you have set Hopping Mode 1 at the transmitter –
the default setting is “4” – then the green Status LED
on the transmitter glows constantly, instead of flashing
as in modes 2 … 5.
Setting the Hopping Mode (Value range: 1 … 5)
With the LED glowing a constant green, hold the programming button pressed in until the LED goes out. The
LED now flashes green slowly to indicate the currently
set Hopping stage. By default this is Hopping Mode 4,
so the LED initially flashes green four times.
At the end of the flashing sequence you can set a
new value within a period of five seconds. Press the
programming button a specific number of times, corresponding to the desired hopping mode. For example, to
set Hopping Mode 3, you would now press the programming button three times.
If you do not press the programming button within five
seconds, or if you enter an invalid value, the LED briefly
flashes alternately red / green (error indicator); in this
case the set value is not altered. After this you will be
returned to expanded programming mode.
Once you have successfully stored a new “value”, the
LED confirms this by flashing green / red / orange in
rapid succession.
Hopping mode
Setting
Predictive, single frequency
1
FCC constant
(USA, twelve channels)
2
FCC adaptive* / constant
(USA, twelve channels)
3
ETSI constant
(Europe, sixteen channels)
4
ETSI adaptive* / constant
(Europe, sixteen channels)
5
*
Adaptive mode is currently under development, and the specification may change.
Unless the iFS system is re-certificated in the USA (this
has already occurred in Europe), the frequencies for
the United States of America, and other states which
acknowledge them, are the same as for predictive single
frequency mode.
CAUTION:
The hopping information is transmitted during
the binding process; see below. If you change the
hopping mode or the output stage, you MUST then
re-bind all your receivers.
Using the transmitter for the first time
23
Using the receiving system for the first time
Preliminary notes, programming the XR-16ifs receiver
(See also the instructions supplied with your particular receiver. For more information please visit the Internet site at www.graupner-ifs-system.de)
Receiving system
The mx-16ifs radio control set includes an XR-16ifs 2.4
GHz bi-directional receiver which is suitable for connection to a maximum of eight servos.
When you switch the receiver on, its Status LED initially
glows constantly for about three seconds, and then
starts flashing red. The latter means that no connection
with a Graupner | iFS RF module exists (at this stage).
To be able to create a connection, the Graupner | iFS
receiver must first be “bound” to “its” Graupner | iFS RF
module (transmitter); this procedure is known as “binding”. However, binding is only necessary once for each
receiver / RF module combination (and can be repeated
whenever you wish – for instance, if you change the
transmitter). The components in your system have
already been bound at the factory.
The set you have purchased implements iFS Version
3, which differentiates between primary, subsidiary and
supplementary receivers:
At the “Binding” stage – see below – receivers defined
as primary units can only be operated separately with
a Graupner | iFS RF module. This eliminates the danger
that a (primary) receiver in another model might respond
to the same transmitter signal when it is switched on.
At the “Binding” stage – see below – receivers defined
as subsidiary units are operated in “Slave mode”, and
are subordinate to the primary (“Master”) receiver.
Subsidiary receivers can therefore be operated in parallel with primary receivers. They are intended primarily
for use in large model aircraft, with the aim of avoiding
long cable connections to the control surface servos,
and the associated losses. A separate power supply can
be used to prevent further unnecessary voltage drop.
However, subsidiary receivers can also be employed at
24
Using the receiving system for the first time
completely different locations from the model, e. g. as
monitor receivers on the ground.
The use of multiple receivers can also make sense in
large model boats such as the Seabex One; with models
such as the Adolph Bermpohl, Theodor Heuss or Bernhard Gruben ocean-going rescue cruisers the subsidiary
receiver can be used to control the ship’s boat using one
and the same transmitter.
The purpose of supplementary receivers (Order No.
23608, see Appendix) is quite different to that of subsidiary receivers: it is to enhance safety. For example,
installing two supplementary receivers in the wingtips
and another in the fin ensures that visual contact is
maintained virtually constantly, with the result that at
least one receiver can pick up the transmitter signal in
any flight attitude.
Note:
The “programming button” referred to in the following
sections is located on the circuit board, and can be
operated using a blunt instrument such as a 1.5 mm
allen key. PLEASE DO NOT USE A SCREWDRIVER
to push the button, as the risk of damaging the circuit
board is too great.
“Binding” the Graupner | iFS receiver
Graupner | iFS receivers must be “instructed” to communicate exclusively with a single Graupner | iFS RF module
(transmitter). This procedure is termed “Binding”, and is
only required once for each new receiver.
During this procedure any other Graupner | iFS main
receiver MUST be switched off BEFORE you switch
the transmitter on.
Now switch the Graupner | iFS receiver on, and wait until
the status LED flashes red. Hold the programming button
on the receiver pressed in until its LED lights up green.
Now release the programming button, and the Status
LED will flash orange, indicating that the receiver is now
waiting for a Graupner | iFS transmitter to initiate the
“binding” process.
At the transmitter end
Locate the Graupner | iFS RF module’s programming
button on the back of the transmitter, and hold it pressed
it while you switch the transmitter on. Hold the button
pressed in while the Status LED first goes out, and then
glows green, then release the programming button.
As soon as you release the programming button, the
transmitter and receiver should bind together: all the
Status LEDs will simultaneously switch to green if the
binding process has been completed successfully. If one
Status LED does not light up green, repeat the whole
procedure.
Binding subsidiary receivers
In Hopping Modes 2 … 5 any number of subsidiary receivers can be bound in common with a (single) primary
receiver. (In contrast, multi-receiver operation is NOT
possible with Hopping Mode 1.)
With the transmitter switched off, switch your subsidiary
Graupner | iFS receiver on. After a few seconds the Status LED starts flashing red. Press and hold the programming button until the LED goes out, then glows green.
Release the button at this point, and the Status LED will
flash orange.
Press and hold the programming button again until the
Status LED changes from flashing orange to constant
orange, indicating that the receiver is now waiting to
be “bound” as a subsidiary receiver. Leave the receiver
switched on until the binding procedure is complete!
Repeat this procedure for as many subsidiary receivers
as you wish to use. Please note that you must always
have one primary receiver, and this is the last one to be
set to binding mode; see left.
• After switching the model off at the end of a flight,
it is ESSENTIAL also to switch the transmitter
off before another model can be operated; this is
due to the “binding” process. For the same reason please ensure that your last model really is
switched off before you switch the next model on.
This is the reason: if you have two or more receivers which are bound to the same transmitter
module, and they are switched on simultaneously
before the associated transmitter is switched on,
“any” of the receivers will bind itself to the transmitter. Other receivers will not bind themselves
unless they are configured as subsidiary receivers; see above.
Caution:
• The transmitter’s hopping mode and the output
stage MUST be defined before you initiate the
binding process – see previous double page!
• To conclude the binding procedure switch off
the receiver(s) and also the transmitter, and
leave them switched off for a few seconds before
switching the transmitter back on, followed by the
receiver(s). Your Graupner | iFS system is ready for
use, BUT ONLY AFTER YOU SWITCH IT OFF, THEN
ON AGAIN.
• Always switch the transmitter on first, and only
then the receiver or receivers.
• If a connection exists, the Status LED on the
transmitter RF module will glow a constant green,
as will that of the receiver, provided that a power output stage between 2 … 5 has been set at the
transmitter; it will glow red if the output power has
been set to 1 - see earlier.
Range-checking
When using the Graupner | iFS system range checks
should be carried out as described in the following
paragraph. Ask a friend to help you when carrying out a
range check.
1. Install the receiver in the model in the appropriate
manner, taking into account the information in the Installation Notes on page 30.
2. Install the antenna on the transmitter if not there.
3. Turn on the radio system so servo movement can be
observed.
4. Using flat ground (pavement, low cut grass, or dirt)
place the R/C device so that the receiver antenna is
no less than 6” / 15 cm from the ground. This might require you elevating the R/C device during the testing.
5. Hold the transmitter at waist-height, away from your
body.
6. Press and hold the programming button on the transmitter module.
7. Walk to a distance of at least 125 feet / 40 meters. If
at any time you experience a pause in controls, try to
reproduce it again and release the button to see if the
pause no longer occurs. If the problem does not occur
now, check to make sure that your receiver is at least
6” / 15 cm from the ground while testing.
8. With the programming button still pressed down, walk
away from the R/C device while moving the sticks until there is intermittent control. If it does not respond
100% fully, do not use the system and contact Graupner GmbH & Co. KG for assistance!
9. If the model is powered, switch the power plant on
and check that it does not cause interference to the
radio control system.
10.This completes the range test.
Note:
In the case of “small” receivers, intended for use in
model cars and / or park-fly model aircraft, you should
carry out the check as described above, but at a range
of about 25 m.
Caution:
During normal operations (i. e. when controlling a
model) never press and hold the programming button on the transmitter module!
Altering the servo outputs
The XR-16ifs receiver includes the option to assign the
control channels to any receiver outputs you like. However, when using the receiver in conjunction with the
mx-16iFS transmitter, we recommend that you leave the
assignment at the 1 : 1 default setting, and if necessary
make use of the “receiv out” option in the »base set.«
menu.
Using the receiving system for the first time
25
National settings
Please refer to the instructions supplied with the receiver,
and the paragraph on page 126.
FAIL-SAFE settings
In its factory default state the receiver is set to maintain
the servos at the last valid position detected by the
receiver (“hold mode”) if a Fail-Safe event should occur. We strongly recommend that you make use of the
system’s safety potential by programming the fail-safe
throttle position of a glow-powered model to idle, or the
throttle position of an electric-powered model to “motor
stopped”. In this way you ensure that the model is much
less likely to cause havoc if subjected to interference;
if this should occur on the ground, the model could
otherwise cause serious personal injury or damage to
property.
A further option can be set which defines the period (1
… max. 5 sec.) after which the Fail-Safe function is to
become active.
The factory default setting is two seconds.
Low voltage warning
If the receiver LED glows orange, then the low voltage
warning indicator is active. This means that the voltage
is or was below about 4.4 V, although the collapse might
have been brief due to a momentary heavy load.
Please ensure that the batteries are fully charged before
you fly your model. Check that control surface linkages
are free-moving; it is good practice to measure the voltage drop over the switch harness installed in the model.
Although the iFS system continues to work down to
voltages below 3.5 V before it automatically restarts,
the warning indicator should not be ignored, as in most
cases it is a clear indication of a power supply which is
not “fit for purpose”.
Safe model operation depends upon many factors, but
one of them is certainly a reliable receiver power supply.
If your model’s linkages are free-moving, the battery is
fully charged, the conductors of the battery connecting
leads are of adequate cross-section, the contact resistance at the connectors is minimal, etc., but the receiver
LEDs insist on glowing a constant red (output stage 1) or
green (output stages 2 … 5), then the servos are drawing
an excessive current for the system. If this should occur,
consider using a higher-capacity battery, perhaps with
five cells, or the PRX stabilised receiver power supply,
Order No. 4136, described in the Appendix.
Servo sockets and polarity
The servo sockets of the Graupner | iFS receiver are
numbered. The socket marked “B/T” is intended for
the battery, but also doubles as the data socket for the
telemetry sensor.
Never connect this socket with reversed polarity!
This would cause the receiver to switch itself on,
and appear to be working normally, but it would not
function correctly!
The power supply voltage is through-connected via all
the numbered sockets. The function of each individual
channel is determined by the transmitter you are using,
rather than by the receiver. Example: the throttle servo
socket is defined by the radio control system, and may
differ according to the make and type. In the case of JR
radio control systems the throttle function is assigned to
channels 1 or 6, whereas it is allocated to channel 3 in
the case of Futaba radio control systems.
Concluding notes:
• The much higher servo resolution of the iFS system
results in a more direct response compared with previous technologies. Please take a little time to become
accustomed to the feeling of finer control!
• If you wish to use a speed controller with integral
BEC* system in parallel with a separate receiver battery, in most cases (depending on the speed controller) the positive terminal (red wire) must be removed
from the three-pin connector, as shown in the diagram. Be sure to read the appropriate notes in the instructions supplied with your speed controller before
doing this.
Carefully raise the central
red
lug of the connector slightly 1
(1), withdraw the red wire
3
2
(2) and insulate the bare
contact with tape to avoid
possible short circuits (3).
Observe the installation notes regarding the servos, receiver and receiver aerial, which you will find on page 30.
*
26
Using the receiving system for the first time
Battery Elimination Circuit
Expanded receiver programming mode
The expanded programming mode enables the user to
alter various receiver characteristics and parameters.
Always read the instructions supplied with your particular XR receiver before making any changes of this
type! If necessary you can also find information on this
subject in the Download area of our website at www.
graupner.de.
Important note:
For the procedure described in the following section
it is ESSENTIAL to switch off every transmitter with
a Graupner | iFS RF module to which the associated
Graupner | iFS receiver has already been “bound”,
before you switch the receiver on.
To enter expanded programming mode, first switch the
receiver on and wait until the Status LED flashes red at
a moderate rhythm. Now use a blunt instrument – such
as a 1.5 mm allen key – to hold the programming button
on the receiver pressed in while the Status LED first
goes out, then lights green, and finally glows a constant
red (the process takes about seven seconds). Now
release the button.
As soon as the receiver is in expanded programming
mode, the Status LED glows a constant red, as you
are now automatically located at the first set-up option
(see table below). The remaining set-up options can be
selected in sequence with brief presses on the programming button. The display of the Status LED changes in
accordance with the following table:
LED
Option
Constant RED
1 Receiver output setting
Constant GREEN
2 National setting
Constant ORANGE
3 (This function is currently not used)
Rapid flashing RED
4 Fail-Safe setting
(channels)
Rapid flashing GREEN
5 Fail-Safe setting (time)
Rapid flashing ORANGE
6 Telemetry set-up*
*
Telemetry applications not currently available..
Option 1: Assigning the control channels to the
receiver outputs
(value range: 1 … max. number of receiver channels)
Note:
The Graupner | iFS receiver includes the option to assign
the control channels to any receiver outputs you like.
However, when using the receiver in conjunction with the
mx-16iFS transmitter, we recommend that you leave the
assignment at the 1 : 1 default setting, and if necessary
make use of the “receiv out” option in the »base set.«
menu; see pages 49 and 53.
With the Status LED glowing constant red – see above –
press and hold the programming button until the LED
goes out.
The LED now flashes orange repeatedly, the number of
flashes corresponding to the number of servo sockets,
followed by a one-second pause. After first selecting this
set-up option (channel 1) the Status LED also flashes
once, followed by a one-second pause.
Every brief press on the programming button cycles
through to the next servo output: this begins with 1 (1
x flash) and ends with the number of channels of your
receiver (“8” for an eight-channel receiver, ”10” for a tenchannel receiver, etc.).
To assign a different channel to the selected receiver
output, press and hold the programming button until
the Status LED goes out. The LED now flashes green
repeatedly, the number of flashes corresponding to the
number of the currently assigned channel.
When the Status LED has indicated the current assignment by flashing green, you have a period of five seconds to enter a new assignment; this is accomplished by
briefly pressing the programming button the appropriate
number of times.
Note:
For the control channel you can enter values within the
range 1 to 16, even if the receiver features fewer servo
sockets. For example, if you wish to use the mx-16iFS
with a six-channel receiver, it is possible to assign control channel 7 or 8 to any of the otherwise unoccupied
outputs 1 … 6.
If you do not press the programming button within the
five-second period, or if the value you enter is higher
than permissible, the LED flashes alternately red and
green (error indicator), and a new assignment is not
carried out. You are then returned to the channel select
point for the assignment process.
However, if a new assignment takes place successfully,
the LED flashes green / red / orange in rapid sequence,
in order to indicate that the change has been implemented.
The option of assigning control channels to any receiver
Expanded receiver programming mode
27
outputs is very practical, especially if the transmitter only
has limited functionality, or if you wish to re-direct channels to different outputs. The default setting is 1 : 1, i. e.
the control channels are passed to the receiver outputs
bearing the same number.
Instead of using a Y-lead you can also assign the same
control function to two or more receiver outputs, e. g.
“Throttle”, in order to operate two or more servos with
one control function. For example, you could leave one
servo at the “normal” output (e. g. for “throttle” control –
channel 1 for fixed-wing models or channel 6 for model
helicopters in the case of most Graupner/JR systems),
and assign the second or subsequent servos to one
or more of the higher-numbered outputs which are not
used as standard. All the outputs are totally synchronised, i. e. the delay which is occasionally observed with
earlier systems is entirely absent. Any servo adjustment
which is carried out in the »servo set.« menu (see page
56), applies to all the servos set up in this way.
value (1) is set, the Status LED therefore flashes once.
When the flashing stops, you have a five-second period to change the country code. This is accomplished
by pressing the programming button repeatedly, the
number of presses corresponding to the codes stated in
the table below.
Option 2: National setting
(value range: 1 … 2)
All countries except France
1
France
2*
This setting applies exclusively to Hopping Mode 1,
and has no effect if any other hopping mode is
selected. You can therefore skip the next section,
provided that you have not changed the hopping
mode from the default setting “4”.
The national setting is necessary in order to satisfy
various directives (FCC, ETSI, IC, etc.). With the Status
LED glowing a constant green – see table in the centre
column on page 27 – press and hold the programming
button until the LED goes out. The LED now flashes
green repeatedly, the number of flashes corresponding to the code number of the set country. If the default
28
Expanded receiver programming mode
Example:
If the country is to be, say, France, press the programming button twice briefly. If you do not press the
programming button within five seconds, or if you enter
a value which is higher than the permissible range, then
the LED flashes alternately red and green (error indicator), and no new national assignment is carried out; you
are then returned to the select point for the programming
options. However, if a change is carried out successfully,
the LED flashes green / red / orange in rapid sequence
to confirm the successful operation.
Country
*
Setting
Open-air operation. Transmitter power “1” or “2” must be selected.
Option 3: Output signal setting
This function is currently not supported. It is planned for
future versions which will permit different methods of
actuating servos, such as sequential, in groups, TruDigital™, etc..
Option 4: Fail-Safe settings
“hold” or “Pos” for channels
(value range: 1 … max. number of receiver outputs)
In the receiver’s default state the servos maintain the
position last detected as valid (“hold”) when interference
occurs, since this is the default setting for all channels.
As described in the following section, or in the instructions supplied with your particular receiver, it is also
possible to set whether the channel maintains the last
correctly received servo position if interference occurs
(“hold”), or – after a period of time – takes up a position
defined using the next option; this can be set separately
for each channel.
With the Status LED flashing red at a rapid rhythm – see
table in the centre column on page 27 – press and hold
the programming button until the LED goes out. The
LED then flashes orange repeatedly, the number of
flashes corresponding to the number of servo outputs,
followed by a one-second pause. After you initially select
this set-up option (channel 1), the Status LED therefore
flashes once followed by a one-second pause.
Every brief press on the programming button cycles
through the next servo output: this starts with 1 (1
x flash) and ends with the number of channels your
receiver supports, so that – for example – the Graupner | iFS eight-channel receiver offers eight possible
set-up positions, whereas, for example, the Graupner | iFS ten-channel receiver features ten possible set-up
positions.
In order to change the fail-safe setting of the selected
receiver output, press and hold the programming button
until the Status LED goes out. The LED then flashes
green, either once for “hold” or twice for “position”.
Once the Status LED has flashed green to indicate the
current setting, you have a period of five seconds to
enter a new setting. This is accomplished by pressing
the programming button briefly the appropriate number
of times: once for “hold”, twice for “position”.
If you do not press the programming button within the
five-second period, or if you enter an invalid number,
then the LED flashes alternately red and green (error
indicator), and no new setting is adopted. You are then
returned to the channel select point for this function.
However, if a new setting is carried out successfully, the
LED flashes green / red / orange in rapid succession to
indicate that the change of setting has been adopted.
The actual fail-safe positions for the selected channels can only be set later, after you have left expanded programming mode; see right-hand page.
Example:
If you are programming a fixed-wing model aircraft and
wish to set the motor to “position”, whilst leaving all the
other channels to “hold”, set channel 1 to 2 x flashing,
and leave all the other channels to 1 x flashing.
The only way of quitting the fail-safe channel setting
is to switch the receiver power supply off.
Option 5: Fail-safe setting – “hold time”
(value range: 1 … 5 seconds)
The fail-safe time is the number of seconds in which
no valid control data is received, before the receiver
switches to fail-safe or hold-mode.
When this “hold time” has elapsed, the receiver switches
over to “fail-safe”: the channels programmed to “position” take up the prescribed fail-safe position, while the
remaining channels maintain the position last picked up
as valid (“hold”).
After selecting this set-up option (the LED flashes green
at a rapid rate – see table in the centre column of page
27) press and hold the programming button until the
LED goes out. The LED now flashes green repeatedly,
the number of flashes corresponding to the number of
seconds selected. For example, if the default value (2) is
set, the Status LED flashes twice.
After the Status LED has flashed green to indicate the
current setting, you have a period of five seconds to
enter a new setting. This is accomplished by pressing
the programming button briefly the appropriate number
of times.
Example:
If you want the fail-safe time to be one second, press
the programming button once briefly. For three seconds,
press it three times briefly, etc..
If you do not press the programming button within the
five-second period, or if you enter an invalid number,
then the LED flashes alternately red and green (error
indicator), and no new setting is adopted. You are then
returned to the channel select point for this function.
However, if a new setting is carried out successfully, the
LED flashes green / red / orange in rapid succession to
indicate that the altered setting has been adopted.
Option 6: Telemetry setting
This option is currently at the development stage.
Quitting expanded programming mode
You can quit expanded programming mode at any time
simply by switching off the receiver power supply.
Defining Fail-Safe positions
Switch the transmitter and receiver on “normally”, and
wait until you can control the servos with the sticks.
Press and hold the programming button on the Graupner | iFS receiver until the Status LED goes out. The
indicator now starts to flash alternately red and green for
a period of about eight seconds.
Within this time you should move the sticks and other
transmitter controls – those that have already been
defined – to the positions which correspond to the servo
settings in the model which you wish to adopt as the
Fail-Safe positions; these settings are then stored in the
receiver when the LED goes out.
Resetting the receiver to the default settings (RESET)
This reset procedure resets all the settings, including the
binding settings. This means that the “binding” procedure must be repeated with this receiver and a Graupner | iFS transmitter module.
To carry out the reset hold the programming button
pressed in while you switch the receiver on. As soon as
the Status LED flashes red, you can release the programming button.
This completes the reset.
Optional programming adapter: XZ-P1 iFS
Order No. 23300
This adapter, which is available as an optional accessory (see Appendix), is a convenient means of programming all the necessary settings in the iFS RF module
and the iFS receiver using a PC and a wireless link.
To switch the receiver into computer programming
mode, press and hold the programming button while you
switch the receiver on. The Status LED will glow orange.
Expanded receiver programming mode
29
Installation Notes
Installing the receiver
Regardless of which Graupner | iFS receiver you are
using, the procedure is always the same:
Please note that the receiver aerial must be arranged
at least 5 cm away from all large metal parts and leads
which are not attached or connected directly to the receiver. This includes steel and carbon fibre components,
servos, fuel pumps, cables of all sorts, etc.. Ideally the
receiver should be installed in an easily accessible
position in the model, away from all other installed
components. Under no circumstances run servo leads
immediately adjacent to the receiver aerial, far less coil
them round it!
Please note that acceleration forces which occur in flight
might cause cables to shift when the model is operating.
For this reason ensure that all leads are prevented from
moving close to the aerial. Moving connections or cables
can cause interference to the system.
Tests have shown that a vertical (upright) installation of
the aerial gives the best results during long approaches.
The servo sockets of Graupner | iFS receivers are
numbered. The socket marked “B/T” is intended for the
battery, but will also be used in future for the data connection of the telemetry sensor.
The power supply is through-connected using all the
numbered receiver sockets.
The function of each individual channel is determined
by the transmitter in use, rather than by the receiver.
Please bear this in mind in particular if you wish to bind
the receiver to a different make of transmitter fitted with
a Graupner | iFS RF module.
The following section contains notes and helpful
ideas on installing radio control components in the
model:
1. Wrap the receiver in foam rubber at least 6 mm thick.
Fix the foam round the receiver using rubber bands,
to protect it from vibration, hard landings and crash
damage.
2. All switches must be installed in a position where
they will not be affected by exhaust gases or vibration. The switch toggle must be free to move over its
full range of travel.
3. Always install servos using the vibration-damping
grommets and tubular metal spacers supplied. The
rubber grommets provide some degree of protection
from mechanical shock and severe vibration. Don’t
over-tighten the servo retaining screws, as this will
compress the grommets and thereby reduce the vibration protection they afford. The system offers good
security and vibration protection for your servos, but
only if the servo retaining screws are fitted and tightened properly. The drawing below shows how to install a servo correctly. The brass spacers should be
pushed into the rubber grommets from the underside.
Servo mounting lug
Retaining screw
Rubber grommet
Tubular brass spacer
4. The servo output arms must be free to move over
their full arc of travel. Ensure that no parts of the me30
Installation Notes
chanical linkage can obstruct the servo in its movement.
The sequence in which the servos are connected to the
receiver is dictated by the model type. Please see the
socket assignments listed on pages 37 / 38 and 41.
Be sure to read the safety notes on pages 3 … 5.
If the receiver is ever switched on when the transmitter
is off, the servos may carry out uncontrolled movements.
You can avoid this by switching the system on in this
order:
Always switch the transmitter on first,
then the receiver.
When switching the system off:
Always switch the receiver off first,
then the transmitter.
When programming the transmitter you must always
ensure that any electric motors in the system cannot
possibly burst into life accidentally, and that an I. C.
engine fitted with an automatic starter cannot start
unintentionally. In the interests of safety it is always best
to disconnect the flight battery, or cut off the fuel supply.
For your notes
31
Definition of terms
Control functions, transmitter controls, function inputs, control channels, mixers, switches, control switches
To make it easier for you to understand the mx-16iFS
manual, the following section contains definitions of many
terms which crop up again and again in the remainder of
the text.
Control function
The term “control function” can be thought of as the
signal generated for a particular function which needs
to be controlled – initially independent of its subsequent
progress through the transmitter. In the case of fixed-wing
model aircraft the control functions include throttle, rudder
and aileron, whereas collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis
are typical of those used for helicopters. The signal of a
control function may be assigned directly, or to several
control channels simultaneously via mixers. A typical
example of the latter is separate aileron servos, or pairs
of roll-axis or pitch-axis servos in a model helicopter. The
essential feature of a control function is its influence on
the mechanical travel of the corresponding servo.
Transmitter control
The term “transmitter control” refers to the mechanical
elements on the transmitter which are operated directly by
the pilot. Their movements in turn generate corresponding
movements in the servos, speed controllers etc. at the receiver end. The transmitter controls include the following:
• The two dual-axis stick units for the control functions
1 to 4; for both model types (“fixed-wing” and “helicopter”) these four functions can be interchanged in any
way you wish using the “Mode” function, e. g. throttle
left or right, without having to re-connect the servos.
The dual-axis stick function for throttle (or airbrakes) is
often referred to as the Ch 1 (Channel 1) control.
• The rotary proportional control fitted at top left
(CTRL 7).
32
Description of transmitter: definition of terms
• The INC / DEC buttons (CTRL 5 + 6) located on either
side of the aerial base.
• Switches SW 1 … 8, if they have been assigned to a
control channel in the »contr set.« menu.
When a proportional transmitter control is operated, the
servo or servos follow the position of the control directly,
whereas a switched channel provides just the two or three
set servo positions.
Function input
This is an imaginary point on the signal path, and must
not be considered the same as the point on the circuit
board where the transmitter control is connected! The two
menus “stick mode” and »contr set.« affect the course of
the signal “after” this point, and it is possible (and likely)
that there will be differences between the number of the
transmitter control (as stated above) and the number of
the subsequent control channel.
Control channel
There is a point on the signal path where the signal
contains all the control information required for a particular servo – this may be directly generated by a transmitter
control or indirectly via a mixer – and from this point on we
call the signal a “control channel”. This signal is specific
to an individual servo, and is only affected by any adjustments carried out in the »servo set.« menu before leaving the transmitter via the RF module in order to actuate
the corresponding servo in the model.
Mixer
The transmitter’s software includes a wide range of mixer
functions. Their purpose is to enable a control function to
affect multiple servos at the branching point of the mixer
input, or alternatively to allow several control functions
to affect one servo. For more information please refer to
the numerous mixer functions as described in the section
starting on page 72 of the manual.
Switch
The three standard switches SW 1 … 3, the three-position
switch SW 6/7 and the momentary button variants SW 4
/ PB 8 can also be incorporated into the programming of
the transmitter controls. However, all these switches are
also capable of controlling various program options, e. g.
starting and stopping timers, switching mixers on and off,
transferring control in Trainer mode etc.. Each physical
switch function can be assigned to as many functions as
you wish.
Numerous examples are described in the manual.
Transmitter control switch
It is often desirable to switch a function on or off automatically at a particular position of another transmitter control,
e. g. at a defined position of one of the dual-axis sticks.
Typical examples are switching a stopwatch on and off to
allow you to record the motor run time, extending spoilers
automatically (and many others). The mx-16iFS software
includes a total of two (three – for helicopters) “control
switches” of this type.
Two transmitter control switches are available for the Ch
1 stick in each model memory, both for fixed-wing model
aircraft and helicopters. For helicopters a third is present
in the form of the throttle limiter; see pages 33 and 62.
This manual includes a range of instructive examples
which make programming as simple as child’s play.
Please refer to the programming examples in the section
starting on page 94.
Assigning switches and control switches
The basic procedure
At many points in the program there is the option of using
a switch (SW 1 … 4, SW 6/7, PB 8) or a control switch
(C1 … 3; see below) to operate a function, or to switch
between settings, such as the DUAL RATE / EXPO
function, flight phase programming, mixers and more.
The mx-16iFS allows you to assign several functions to
a single switch.
The process of assigning switches is exactly the same
in all the relevant menus, and we will explain the basic
programming procedure at this point so that you can
concentrate on the special features when reading the
detailed menu descriptions.
A switch symbol appears in the bottom line of the screen
at all programming points where switches can be assigned:
If you move to this field using the rotary cylinder, the
switch symbol field is highlighted (inverse video – black
background):
This is the procedure for assigning a switch:
1. Press the rotary cylinder.
The following message appears on the screen:
push desired switch
into position ON
2. Now simply move the switch you wish to use to the
“ON” position, press the push-button, or move the
Ch 1 stick from the “OFF” position in the direction of
“ON”. Please note: the so-called control switches assigned to this transmitter control (see right) carry out
the task of an ON / OFF switch in software; the same
applies to the throttle limiter (see page 62) which is
available in the “Helicopter” model type. This completes the assignment process.
3. Changing the direction of switching:
If the switch turns out to work in the wrong direction,
you can correct it as follows: move the switch to the
desired OFF position, select the switch symbol once
more and assign the switch again, this time with the
switch direction you prefer.
4. Erasing a switch:
Activate the switch symbol as described under Point
2, then press the CLEAR button.
Special feature: SW 4 / PB 8
This “push-button” can be assigned in two ways:
• A brief press as On / Off switch “4”, i. e.. the switched
state (“on” or “off”) changes every time you press the
button.
• A longer press as momentary button “8”, i. e.. the
switch is only ON as long as the button is held
pressed in.
Note:
Every time you switch the transmitter on, switch 4 always
defaults to the “OFF” position.
Transmitter control switches
Many functions are best controlled automatically by a
particular position of the Ch 1 transmitter stick (or the
throttle limiter in the case of helicopters), rather than by a
conventional physical switch.
Typical applications:
• Automatically switching an on-board glowplug energizer on and off according to the throttle position of
the Ch 1 stick (“C1” or “C2”). In this case the switch
for the plug energizer is controlled by a mixer at the
transmitter.
• Automatically switching a stopwatch on and off to
record the pure “flight time” of a model helicopter; this
is accomplished using the “C3” switch of the throttle limiter.
• Automatically switching the “ail ¼ rudd” mixer off
when the airbrakes are extended, in order to keep
the wings parallel with the ground when landing on
a slope face, without the (usually coupled) rudder affecting the model’s heading.
• Automatically extending landing flaps with coupled elevator trim adjustment on the landing approach, as
soon as the throttle stick is reduced below the set
threshold point.
• Automatically switching a stopwatch on and off in order to time the run of an electric motor.
For both model types the mx-16iFS transmitter’s
software caters for these purposes with two “control
switches” of this type; they can be assigned to the Ch 1
stick: “C1” is switched on at around -80% of full travel,
while “C2” is switched on at around +80%. The Helicopter
program also includes an extra control switch “C3” on the
throttle limiter close to the 100% point; see pages 33 and
62.
All these control switches can be included without
restriction in the free programming of the switches, i. e..
they can be assigned to a function instead of a physical switch. This means that you are able to assign one
of the control switches C1 … C2 (or C1 … C3) instead
of a physical switch at any point in the software where
switches are assigned. All you have to do is move the Ch
1 stick or the throttle limiter control (by default the rotary
proportional control CTRL 7) from the desired “OFF”
position in the direction of “ON”.
Description of transmitter: switch assignment
33
Digital trims
Description of function, and Ch 1 cut-off trim
34
Digital trims
1. Fixed-wing models
The Ch 1 trim features a special cut-off trim which is
designed for glowplug motors: you initially use the trim
lever in the usual way to select a reliable idle setting for
the motor.
If you now move the Ch 1 trim lever to its end-point in
the direction of “motor cut-off”, pushing the lever in a
single movement, a marker appears on the screen in the
last position. You can now return to the idle setting for
starting the motor simply by pushing the stick one click
in the direction of “open throttle”.
Current trim
position
2. Model helicopters
In helicopter mode the Ch 1 trim has another feature in
addition to “cut-off trim”, as described under “Fixed-wing
models” on the left; this time in conjunction with the
“Throttle limit function” (see page 62): while the throttle
limit slider is in the bottom half of its travel, i. e. in the
“start-up range”, the Ch 1 trim lever acts as idle trim on
the throttle limit, and the idle trim is displayed on the
screen:
Current
trim position
ELE
Last idle position
Ch 1 trim lever
ELE
h
stop
f lt
«normal
K78
Idle direction
Digital trims with visual and audible indicators
Both the dual-axis stick units are fitted with digital trim
systems. When you give the trim lever a brief push (one
“click”), the neutral position of the associated stick channel changes by one increment. If you hold the trim lever
in one direction, the trim value changes continuously in
the corresponding direction with increasing speed.
The degree of trim offset is also “audible”, as the pitch of
the tone changes to reflect the setting. When you are flying a model, you can find the trim centre position easily
without having to look at the screen: if you over-run the
centre setting, the trim stays in the centre position for a
moment.
The current trim values are automatically stored when
you switch from one model memory to another. The digital trims are also stored separately for each flight phase
within a model memory, with the exception of the “Ch 1”
(Channel 1) trim, which is the throttle / airbrake trim on a
fixed-wing model.
The Ch 1 trim includes another special function which
makes it easy to re-locate the idle throttle setting of a
glowplug motor.
However, since the trim functions described in these
instructions only affect the “Motor off” direction, the trim
display on the transmitter’s screen will vary according
to your individual set stick mode, i. e.. the “forward” or
“back” throttle / collective pitch minimum position of the
Ch 1 stick, and also according to “left stick” or “right
stick” for throttle / collective pitch. The illustrations in
these instructions always refer to “Throttle / Collective
pitch right” for both model types, and to “Throttle back”
for fixed-wing models and “Collective pitch forward” for
model helicopters.
h
Trim at motor
OFF position
stop
flt
«norm
K78
Throttle limit control
CTRL 7
Last idle position
In contrast to a fixed-wing model aircraft, this display is
suppressed if the throttle limit control is moved to the
“right” half of its travel.
Trim at motor OFF position
The cut-off trim feature is disabled if you enter “no” or
“no / inv” in the “motor on C1” line within the »base
sett.« menu (page 47).
Note:
Since this trim function is only effective in the “Motor off” direction, the above illustration will not apply if
you change the direction of the Ch 1 stick for throttle
minimum from “back” (which is reflected in the illustration above) to “forward” in the “Motor” line of the »base
sett.« menu.
ELE
h
stop
fl t
«norm
K78
Throttle limit control
CTRL 7
Note regarding helicopters:
The Ch 1 trim only affects the throttle servo and not the
collective pitch servos; it also works evenly over the full
stick travel. Please note that the helicopter throttle servo
must be connected to receiver output 6 (see Receiver
socket assignment, page 41).
For your notes
35
Fixed-wing model aircraft
This program provides convenient support for normal
model aircraft with up to two aileron servos and two flap
servos, V-tail models, flying wings and deltas with two
elevon (aileron / elevator) servos and two flap servos.
The majority of power models and gliders belong to the
“normal” tail type with one servo each for elevator, rudder, ailerons and throttle or electronic speed controller
(airbrakes on a glider). There is also the special model
type “2 elev sv” which provides a means of connecting
two elevator servos to channels 3 and 8 in parallel.
If your model features two separate aileron servos (and
also in some cases two flap servos), the aileron travel of
both pairs of control surfaces can be set up with differential movement in the »wing mixer« menu, i. e. the
down-travel can be set independently of the up-travel.
Finally the program caters for camber-changing flaps,
which can be operated by any of the transmitter controls
“CTRL 5 … 7”. Alternatively a phase-specific trim is
available for flaps, ailerons and elevator in the »phase
trim« menu.
If the model features a V-tail instead of a conventional
tail, you need to select the tail type “V-tail” in the »base
sett.« menu, as this automatically superimposes the
elevator and rudder control functions in such a way that
each tail panel can be actuated by a separate servo.
For deltas and flying wings it is easy to set up mixed
elevons, i. e. the aileron and elevator functions can be
carried out via common control surfaces at the trailing
edge of the right and left wing. As standard the program
contains the appropriate mixer functions for the two
servos.
Up to three flight phases can be programmed in each of
the twelve model memories.
The digital trim positions are stored separately for each
flight phase, with the exception of the Ch 1 trim. The
Ch 1 trim provides a simple means of re-locating the
correct idle throttle setting.
Two timers are available at all times when flying. The
screen also displays the transmitter operating time since
the battery was last charged.
The switches SW 1 … 8 and the transmitter controls
CTRL 5 … 7 can be assigned to any of the inputs 5 … 8
in the »cont set.« menu.
“Dual Rate” and “Exponential” can be programmed
separately for aileron, rudder and elevator, giving two
modes of control.
Depending on the model type you have selected, the
»wing mixer« menu presents you with up to twelve additional pre-defined mixers and coupling functions which
you can simply select and set up when necessary, in
addition to three free mixers:
1. Aileron differential (switchable)
2. Flap differential (switchable)
3. Aileron ¼ rudder (switchable)
4. Aileron ¼ flap (switchable)
5. Airbrake ¼ elevator (switchable)
6. Airbrake ¼ flap (switchable)
7. Airbrake ¼ aileron (switchable)
8. Elevator ¼ flap (switchable)
9. Elevator ¼ aileron (switchable)
10. Flap ¼ elevator (switchable)
11. Flap ¼ aileron (switchable)
12. Differential reduction
Airbrake-Function 1
r
va
t
Ail e r o
Fla p
r
A il
left
F la p Õ E
va
Ele to
a tor
ev
Airbrake Õ
Flap
Airbrake Õ
Elevator
r Õ Flap
Flap
l e ro n
Õ
ElevatorÕ Flap
right
left
Rudder/Elevator
V-Tail
F la p Õ E le v ator
Õ
right
A il e r o n Õ
R u dder
E le v at or Õ A ileron
36
Fixed-wing model aircraft
Aileron
Airbrake Õ
Flap
Airbrake Õ
Elevator
A ileron
F la p
Fl a p
Ai
nÕ
dde
A il e r o n
Ailero
n Õ Rudder
Ru
Õ
l
A il e ro
Õ
at or
E l ev
F la pÕ
Fl ap
on
Airbrake Õ
n Õ Flap
n
er
Ele
Ele v
Õ
Ail e r o
or
Fl a p Õ
ato
rÕ
Ai
le
on
F la
p
Õ
Aileron
Receiver socket assignment for models with up to two ailerons and two flaps, plus “normal” tail type, V-tail,
and two elevator servos (3 + 8)
8 = 2nd elevator / aux. function
7 = Right flap / reserve
6 = Flap / left flap / reserve
5 = Right aileron / reserve
4 = Rudder / right V-tail
LED
Made in Malaysia
2 = Aileron / left aileron
Servo
Switch harness
Receiver battery
C 577
4,8 V
SCAN
FM
für das 35MHz/35MHz-B-Band
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Best.-Nr. 4101
Best.-Nr.
7052
PLL-Synthesizer-MICRO-SUPERHET
Kanal 60-282/182-191
8/Batt.
3 = Elevator / left V-tail
1 = Throttle / brake
Installation notes
The servos MUST be connected to the receiver
outputs in the following order:
Outputs not required are simply left vacant. Please note
the following points in particular:
• If you are using only one aileron servo, receiver
output 5 (right aileron) is left unused; it can also be
used for another purpose if you select “1 aile” in the
»base sett.« menu.
• If you are using only one flap servo, receiver output 7
(right flap) MUST be left unused, assuming that you
have selected “2 ail 2 fl” in the »base sett.« menu.
If you are using a GRAUPNER transmitter to control a
model which was formerly flown using a different make
of transmitter fitted with a Graupner | iFS RF module,
e. g. when using the mx-16iFS for Trainer mode operations, it may be necessary to re-arrange the servo
sequence at the receiver outputs as shown in the
diagram on the left. However, an alternative method is
to use the “receiv(er) out(put)” sub-menu of the »base
sett.« menu; see page 49. Different methods of installing servos and control linkages may make it necessary
to reverse the direction of rotation of some servos when
programming. In both cases this is carried out in the
»servo set.« menu; see page 56.
Please also read the information on the following
pages.
Fixed-wing models: receiver assignment
37
Receiver socket assignment for models of the “Delta / Flying wing” type, with up to two flaps
8 = Auxiliary function
As there are several possible combinations of servo
orientation and control surface linkage, you may find that
the direction of rotation of one or more servos is incorrect. Use the following table to solve the problem.
Model
type
7 = Right flap / reserve
V-tail
6 = Flap / left flap / reserve
5 = Reserve function
4 = Rudder
LED
für das 35MHz/35MHz-B-Band
Made in Malaysia
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 = Left elevon
Servo
Switch harness
Receiver battery
C 577
4,8 V
SCAN
FM
Best.-Nr. 4101
Best.-Nr.
7052
PLL-Synthesizer-MICRO-SUPERHET
Kanal 60-282/182-191
8/Batt.
3 = Right elevon
1 = Throttle / brake
Delta,
flying
wing
Servo rotating in
wrong direction
Remedy
Rudder and elevator
reversed
Reverse servos 3 + 4 in
the »servo set.« menu
Rudder correct,
elevator reversed
Swap over servos 3 + 4
at the receiver
Elevator correct,
rudder reversed
Reverse servos 3 + 4 in
the »servo set.« menu,
AND swap over at the
receiver
Elevator and ailerons Reverse servos 2 + 3 in
reversed
the »servo set.« menu
Elevator correct,
ailerons reversed
Reverse servos 2 + 3 in
the »servo set.« menu,
AND swap over at the
receiver
Ailerons correct,
elevator reversed
Swap over servos 2 + 3
at the receiver
All menus which are relevant to fixed-wing models are
marked with an “aeroplane” symbol in the “Program
descriptions”:
This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus
when programming a fixed-wing model aircraft.
38
Fixed-wing models: receiver assignment
For your notes
39
Model helicopters
The continued development of model helicopters and
helicopter components, such as gyros, speed governors,
rotor blades etc., has led to the current position where
helicopters are capable of sophisticated 3-D aerobatics.
In contrast, if you are a beginner to helicopter flying, you
need a simple set-up so that you can quickly get started
on the initial stages of hovering practice, and then
gradually work up to more complex models which exploit
all the options provided by the mx-16iFS.
The helicopter program of the mx-16iFS can cope
with all current model helicopters equipped with 1 … 4
servos for collective pitch control, entirely regardless of
whether they are powered by a fuel-driven or electric
motor.
Each model memory can include two flight phases plus
auto-rotation.
Two timers are constantly included in the basic screen
display. At the same time the period which has elapsed
since the last charge process is also displayed.
You can return to the correct idle position for the digital
Ch 1 trim simply by pressing a button.
“Dual Rate” and “Exponential” are available for roll,
pitch-axis and tail rotor; they can be coupled together,
and programmed to provide two settings.
All the transmitter controls (CTRL) and switches (SW)
can be assigned to inputs 5 … 8 in virtually any order.
This is carried out in the »contr set.« menu.
In addition to three linear mixers, which can be assigned
to any functions and can also be switched on and off,
the »heli mixer« menu provides five-point curves for
the collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixers, variable
separately for each flight phase; these provide nonlinear mixer characteristics.
1. Collective pitch
2. C1 ¼ throttle
3. C1 ¼ tail rotor
Such advanced features are not needed by the begin-
Collective
Pitch Curve
Channel 1
40
Model helicopters
Throttle
ner, who will initially simply set the hover point to coincide with the centre point of the stick arc, and adjust the
collective pitch travel as required.
Moreover the »heli mixer« menu offers two additional
set-up options in the lines “Gyro” and “I8”.
The mixer inputs for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis
can then be adjusted in the »swashp.mix« menu.
The throttle limit function in the »contr set.« menu
provides an effective means of starting the motor in any
flight phase. By default the proportional rotary control
CTRL 7 is assigned to this input, and this control function determines the maximum throttle servo position,
i. e. the trim lever controls the motor over the idle range.
Only when the rotary knob is turned in the direction
of full-throttle do the programmed throttle curves take
effect. If you have set up the two timers, they also start
recording the flight time automatically at this pint. See
page 52 for more information on this.
1
Channel
Tail Rotor
Note for modellers upgrading from earlier GRAUPNER systems:
Compared with the previous receiver channel sequence,
servo socket 1 (collective pitch servo) and servo socket
6 (throttle servo) have been interchanged. The servos
MUST be connected to the receiver output sockets in
the order shown at bottom right. Outputs not required
are simply left vacant. For more information on the different types of swashplate, please refer to the »base sett.«
menu described on page 51.
All menus which are relevant to model helicopters are
marked with a “helicopter” symbol in the “Program
descriptions”:
This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus
when programming a model helicopter.
Receiver socket assignment for model helicopters
8 = (Speed governor)
Installation notes
The servos MUST be connected to the receiver
outputs in the order shown on this page. Outputs not
required are simply left vacant.
Please note the additional information on the following pages.
Note:
To be able to exploit all the convenience and safety
features of the throttle limiter (see page 62), the speed
controller should be connected to receiver output “6”,
and not to receiver output “8”, as shown in the drawing
on the left. See page 81 for more details.
7 = (Gyro gain)
6 = Throttle servo
(speed controller)
5 = Free, or pitch-axis (2) servo
4 = Tail rotor servo (gyro)
LED
Made in Malaysia
2 = Roll-axis (1) servo
Receiver battery
Servo
Switch harness
C 577
4,8 V
SCAN
FM
für das 35MHz/35MHz-B-Band
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Best.-Nr. 4101
Best.-Nr.
7052
PLL-Synthesizer-MICRO-SUPERHET
Kanal 60-282/182-191
8/Batt.
3 = Pitch-axis (1) servo
1 = PCollective pitch or roll-axis
(2) or pitch-axis (2) servo
If you are using a GRAUPNER transmitter to control a
model which was formerly flown using a different make
of transmitter fitted with a Graupner | iFS RF module,
e. g. when using the mx-16iFS for Trainer mode operations, it may be necessary to re-arrange the servo
sequence at the receiver outputs as shown in the
diagram on the left. However, an alternative method is
to use the “receiv(er) out(put)” sub-menu of the »base
sett.« menu; see page 53. Different methods of installing servos and control linkages may make it necessary
to reverse the direction of rotation of some servos when
programming. In both cases this is carried out in the
»servo set.« menu; see page 56.
Model helicopters: installation and connections 41
Detailed description of programming
Reserving a new memory
If you have already read through the manual to this
point, you will undoubtedly have made your first attempt
at programming the system already. Even so, it is important to describe each menu here in detail, to ensure that
you have comprehensive instructions for each application you are likely to encounter.
In this section we start with setting up a “free” model
memory prior to “programming” a new model:
GRAUBELE
#01
12.0V
0:00h
0:00
stop
0:00
flt
«normal »
K78 IFS
Note:
You can adjust the screen contrast at any time by turning the rotary cylinder when held in.
From the basic display press the ENTER button to move
to the “Multi-function list”. You can return to the basic
screen at any time by pressing ESC. If necessary, select
the »mod. mem.« (Model memory) menu from the list
using the rotary cylinder …
mod.mem.
servo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
select model
clear model
copy mod–>mod
=>
=>
=>
Now press ENTER or the rotary cylinder again to move
on to the “select model” sub-menu.
01
02
03
04
05
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
In the transmitter’s default state the first model memory
is already initialised with the “Fixed-wing model”
model type, while the remainder are not yet occupied;
these are entitled “ÃÃemptyÔ. If you want to set up
a fixed-wing model, then you can immediately start the
programming procedure after leaving the “select model”
sub-menu and the »mod. mem.« menu by pressing
ESC each time … alternatively you can select one of the
free model memories, and press ENTER or the rotary
cylinder.
01
02
03
04
05
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
… then press ENTER or the rotary cylinder.
You are now invited to select the basic model type, i. e.
either “Fixed-wing” or “Helicopter”:
42
Program description: reserving a new memory
Sel model type
( empty mod mem )
Use the rotary cylinder to select the appropriate model
type, then press ENTER or the rotary cylinder to confirm
your choice. The screen switches back to the basic
display: the model memory is now reserved for your
chosen model type.
However, if you wish to get started with a helicopter, then select one of the model memories entitled
“ÃÃemptyÔ, and confirm your choice with a brief
press on the rotary cylinder or the ENTER button. You
are now requested to define the basic model type, i. e.
either “fixed-wing” or “helicopter”. Use the rotary cylinder to select the corresponding symbol, then press the
rotary cylinder or the ENTER button again briefly. This
initialises the selected model type for the model memory
you just selected, and you can now start programming
your model in this memory.
It is now only possible to change this memory to a different model type if you first erase the model memory
(»mod. mem.« menu, page 44).
Note:
• If you wish to erase the model memory which is currently active in the basic display, you will have to define one of the two model types “fixed-wing” or “helicopter” immediately after completing the erase
procedure. You cannot avoid making this choice by
switching the transmitter off. If you wish to remove a
model memory which you inadvertently occupied, you
can simply erase it from a different model memory.
However, if you erase a model memory which is not
currently active, after the procedure you will see the
memory marked as “ÃÃemptyÔ under “Model Select”.
• All the transmitter’s functions are barred, and the
transmitter does not broadcast a signal, until you
confirm the model type you have selected. If you
switch the transmitter off before you set the model
type, the screen will automatically switch to the Model Type Select display when turned on again. You
must always define a model type!
• If the warning
throttle
too
high !
appears on the screen, move the throttle stick back in
the direction of idle.
This warning only appears in accordance with the
settings you have entered in the “motor on C1” or
“pitch min.” section of the »base sett.« menu, as
described on pages 46 and 50. If you are setting up
a non-powered fixed-wing model, enter “no” or “no
/ inv” at this point; this disables the throttle warning
message, and makes available the “Brake ¼ N.N.*”
mixers in the »wing mixer« menu, which would
otherwise be suppressed.
• If the transmitter’s model memories are already occupied, then a pictogram of the selected model type appears in the appropriate model memory, followed by
a blank line, or the model’s name if a name has been
entered in the »base sett.« menu (pages 46 and 50).
• If the battery voltage is too low, the software prevents
*
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
you switching model memories in the interests of
safety. In this case the screen displays this message:
not possible now
vo l t a g e t o o l o w
Basically there are now four different methods of assigning the four control functions aileron, elevator, rudder
and throttle / airbrakes (fixed-wing model), and roll,
pitch-axis, tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch (model
helicopter) to the two primary dual-axis sticks. Which of
these options is adopted depends on the personal preference of the individual model flyer. This function is set
in the “stick mode” line for the currently active model
memory in the »base sett.« menu (page 46 or 50):
You will find a description of the basic steps for programming a fixed-wing model aircraft in the Programming
Examples section starting on page 96; for model helicopters the equivalent section starts on page 116.
In contrast, the following menu descriptions are arranged in the order that they are listed in the individual
menus in the multi-function list.
model name GRAUBELE
stick mode
1
motor on C1 no
normal
tail type
SEL
As mentioned earlier, for maximum flexibility the
transmitter controls 5 … 8 are not assigned to transmitter controls by default, and can be assigned to any
channels you like; this also helps to avoid accidental
mishandling.
This means that in the default state of the equipment
only those servos connected to receiver outputs 1
… 4 can be controlled by the two dual-axis sticks,
whereas servos connected to sockets 5 … max. 8
remain steadfastly at their centre position. If you set
up a new model helicopter, servo 6 also responds to the
controls. In both model types this situation only changes
once you have carried out the appropriate assignments
in the »contr set.« menu.
Program description: reserving a new memory
43
Model memories
Calling up a model, erasing a model, copying model ¼ model
The section on pages 18 and 19 explains the basic
method of using the buttons, while the previous double
page explains how to move to the Multi-function list and
reserve a new model memory. At this point we now wish
to start with the “normal” description of the individual
menu points in the sequence in which they occur on the
transmitter itself. For this reason we start with the menu …
Select model
Model memory
If you now press the ENTER button or the rotary cylinder again, you move to the “select model” sub-menu:
mod.mem.
servo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
The transmitter can store up to twelve complete sets
of model data, including the digital trim values set by
the four trim levers. The trims are automatically stored,
which means that the settings you have carefully established through test-flying are never lost when you swap
models. If you have entered a model name in the »base
sett.« menu (pages 46 and 50), the name appears in
all three sub-menus of the »mod. mem.« menu following the model number and a pictogram of the selected
model type.
Use the rotary cylinder to select the »mod. mem.«
menu, and press ENTER or the rotary cylinder:
select model
clear model
copy mod–>mod
01
02
03
04
05
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
STARLET
BELL47G
¿¿empty¿
Now use the rotary cylinder to select from the list the
model you wish to use, and confirm your selection by
pressing the ENTER button or the rotary cylinder. Pressing ESC takes you back to the previous menu page
without switching models.
Notes:
• If the warning message “Throttle too high” appears
when you switch models, the throttle stick (Ch 1) is
set towards full throttle and should be moved back
to idle.
• If the battery voltage is too low, it may not be possible
to switch model memories for safety reasons. In this
case the screen displays the following message:
not possible now
vo l t a g e t o o l o w
44
Program description: model memories
=>
=>
=>
Clear model
Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in and select the “clear
model” sub-menu, then press ENTER or the rotary
cylinder:
select model
clear model
copy mod–>mod
=>
=>
=>
Use the rotary cylinder to select from the list the model
you wish to erase …
m odel
01
02
03
04
to be cleared :
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
STARLET
BELL47G
… then press ENTER or the rotary cylinder. The program responds with the security query:
model
GRAUBELE
01
to be erased ?
NO
YES
If you answer NO , the process is interrupted, and
you are returned to the previous screen page. If you
answer YES with the rotary cylinder and confirm your
choice with ENTER or by pressing the rotary cylinder,
then the selected model memory is erased.
Caution:
The erasure process is irrevocable. All model memory data is reset to the factory default settings.
Note:
If you wish to erase the currently active model memory
in the basic display, you will be required to define the
model type “Helicopter” or “Fixed-wing” immediately.
However, if you erase a non-active model memory, then
the message “ÃÃemptyÔ appears in the Model select
menu.
Copy model ¼ model
Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in, select the “Copy
model ¼ model” sub-menu, and press ENTER or the
rotary cylinder:
select model
clear model
copy mod–>mod
=>
=>
=>
Select the model to be copied using the rotary cylinder …
model
02
ULTIMATE
¿¿empty¿
05
to be copied ?
NO
YES
Selecting NO interrupts the process, and returns you
to the previous page. If you select YES with the rotary
cylinder, and confirm your choice with ENTER or the
rotary cylinder, then the selected model is copied into
the chosen target model memory.
copy from model :
01
GRAUBELE
ULTIMATE
02
03
STARLET
BELL47G
04
... then press ENTER or the rotary cylinder again. In the
“Copy to model” window you can now select the target
memory and confirm your choice with ENTER or the rotary cylinder. Alternatively you can interrupt the process
with ESC. It is possible to overwrite a model memory
which already contains model data.
copy to model :
ULTIMATE
02
03
STARLET
BELL47G
04
¿¿empty¿
05
When you confirm the selected model memory by pressing the ENTER button or the rotary cylinder, the security
query appears:
Program description: model memories
45
Basic settings
Basic model-specific settings for fixed-wing model aircraft
left aileron
left rudder
right aileron
idle
elev. up
»MODE 3« (Throttle at right stick) »MODE 4« (Throttle at left stick)
Motor Vollgas
elev. up
full throttle
idle
elev. down
idle
left rudder
elev. down
right rudder
46
idle
elev. down
right aileron
Use the rotary cylinder to select the first character in the
symbol field. A brief press on the rotary cylinder (or turning it when pressed) moves to the next position in the
name, at which point you can again select a character.
Pressing CLEAR inserts a space at that point.
elev. up
full throttle
right rudder
model name GRAUB
full throttle
right rudder
0123456789 : ;
?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
elev. down
right aileron
Press ENTER or the rotary cylinder to move to the next
screen page (
), where you can select characters
to assemble the model name. You can enter up to nine
characters to define a model name:
»MODE 1« (Throttle at right stick) »MODE 2« (Throttle at left stick)
right aileron
no
normal
left aileron
1
right rudder
model name
stick mode
motor on C1
tail type
left aileron
Model name
Stick mode
Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the
principal control functions of a fixed-wing model on the
two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are aileron,
elevator, rudder and throttle (or airbrakes). Which of
these options you select depends on your individual
preferences and flying style:
left rudder
base sett.
contr set.
phase trim
free mixer
left rudder
mod.mem.
servo set.
D/R expo
wing mixer
You can move to any character position within the input
field with the rotary cylinder pressed in; it is indicated
by a double arrow <––> above the input field while the
rotary cylinder is held pressed in.
The model name entered in this way appears in the
basic display, and also in the sub-menus of the »mod.
mem.« menu.
left aileron
Before you start programming specific parameters,
some basic settings must be entered which apply only
to the currently active model memory. Select the »base
sett.« menu with the rotary cylinder, and press ENTER
or the rotary cylinder:
elev. up
When you select “stick mode” with the rotary cylinder
pressed in, you will see SEL at the bottom edge of the
screen:
Program description: basic settings – fixed-wing model
model name GRAUBELE
1
stick mode
motor on C1 no
tail type
normal
SEL
Press the ENTER button or the rotary cylinder, and the
current stick mode is highlighted (inverse video – black
background). Now use the rotary cylinder to select one
of the options 1 to 4.
Pressing CLEAR resets the function to stick mode “1”.
motor on C1
model name GRAUBELE
1
stick mode
motor on C1 no
tail type
normal
SEL
When you select “motor on C1” with the rotary cylinder
pressed in, you will see SEL at the bottom edge of the
screen. Press the rotary control briefly: the current setting is highlighted. Now use the rotary cylinder to switch
between the four possible options:
“idle fr.”:
The idle position of the throttle / airbrake
stick (Ch 1) is forward, i. e. away from the
pilot.
The throttle warning message “Throttle
too high” is activated (see page 18). In
the »wing mixer« menu the “Brake ¼
N.N.*” mixers are disabled.
“idle re.”:
The idle position of the throttle / airbrake
stick (Ch 1) is back, i. e. towards the pilot.
The throttle warning message “Throttle
“no”:
“no/inv”
too high” is activated (see page 18). In
the »wing mixer« menu the “Brake ¼
N.N.*” mixers are disabled.
The brake system is “retracted” in the
forward position of the throttle / brake
stick. In the »wing mixer« menu the
“Brake ¼ N.N.*” mixers are activated.
The throttle warning message “Throttle
too high” is disabled.
The brake system is “retracted” in the
back position of the throttle / brake stick.
In the »wing mixer« menu the “Brake
¼ N.N.*” mixers are activated.
The throttle warning message “Throttle
too high” is disabled.
Notes:
• Depending on your choice in this menu, the Ch 1 trim
acts “normally” (over the full control travel), or just
at the idle end of the range, i. e. only at the “back” or
“forward” end of the stick travel.
• Cut-off trim: this special function is described on
page 34.
Tail
model name GRAUBELE
1
stick mode
motor on C1 no
tail type
normal
SEL
When you select “tail type” with the rotary cylinder
pressed in, you will see SEL appear at the bottom edge
*
of the screen. Press the ENTER button or the rotary
cylinder: the current setting is highlighted. Now use the
rotary cylinder to select the option which matches your
model:
„normal“:
This setting caters for all models in which
each of the functions elevator and rudder
is operated by one servo.
„V-tail“:
The elevator and rudder controls are
operated by two control surfaces set in a
V-shape, each controlled by a separate
servo. The two-way coupling function for
the rudder and elevator control systems
is automatically carried out by the transmitter software. If necessary, the ratio
of rudder travel to elevator travel can be
adjusted in the »D/R expo« menu (page
66).
„Delt/FlW“: The mixed elevon (aileron and elevator) control system requires two or four
separate servos, one or two in each wing.
However, the elevator trim only affects
servos 2 + 3, even if you select “2ail 2fl”
– see right-hand column.
„2 elev sv“: This option is designed for model aircraft
with two elevator servos. When the elevator stick is moved, the servo connected
to receiver output 8 moves in parallel with
servo 3. The elevator trim lever affects
both servos.
Note regarding “2 elev sv”:
In this mode a transmitter control which
is assigned to input 8 in the »contr set.«
menu is de-coupled from servo “8”; this is
for safety reasons.
Ailerons / Camber-changing flaps
stick mode
motor on C1
tail type
aile / flap
1
no
normal
1aile
SEL
When you select the “aile / flap” line with the rotary cylinder pressed in, you will see SEL appear at the bottom
edge of the screen. Press ENTER or the rotary cylinder,
and the current setting is highlighted. Now use the rotary
cylinder to select one of the three options.
“1aile”
Both ailerons are actuated by a single
servo.
“2aile”
Each aileron is actuated by a separate
servo.
“2ail2fl”
Each aileron is actuated by a separate
servo; there are also one or two camberchanging flap servos.
The mixers and associated adjustment facilities which
appear in the »wing mixer« menu (see section starting on page 72) vary according to the data you enter
here. The software provides a maximum of twelve
ready-made mixers for up to two aileron servos and two
camber-changing flap servos.
Note:
If your model is equipped with only one flap servo, you
should still select “2ail 2fl”, but leave the “ail ¼ flaps”
mixer in the »wing mixer« menu (see page 72) at 0%.
In contrast, all the other wing mixers can be used in the
usual way.
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
Program description: basic settings – fixed-wing model
47
Timers
Two timers are shown in the basic display: one stopwatch and one flight timer.
GRAUBELE
#01
9.6V
5:30h
0:00
stop
0:00
flt
«normal »
K78 IFS
You can assign a physical switch or a control switch to
these two timers in the “Timers” line …
motor on C1
tail type
aile / flap
clock
no
normal
2aile
0:00
SEL SEL
… using the switch symbol on the right-hand side. The
assigned switch starts both timers, and also halts the
stopwatch.
The method of assigning a physical switch or a control
switch is described on page 33.
The flight timer always starts simultaneously with the
stopwatch, but continues to run even when the stopwatch is halted (switched off). It can only be stopped by
pressing ESC with the stopwatch halted.
Once stopped, pressing CLEAR resets both timers to
the initial value.
48
Switching between “count-up” and “count-down”
Count-up timer (stopwatch function)
If you assign a switch and start the stopwatch with the
initial value of “0:00”, the timer runs up until the maximum of 999 minutes and 59 seconds, then re-starts at
0:00.
Count-down timer (alarm timer function)
You can use the left-hand SEL field to select a starting time within the range 0 to 180 minutes; using the
right-hand SEL field the range is 0 to 59 seconds. Any
combination of times can also be selected.
(CLEAR = “0” or “00”.)
motor on C1 no
normal
tail type
2aile
aile / flap
C2
10:01
clock
SEL SEL
Procedure
1. Select the SEL field with the rotary cylinder.
2. Press the rotary cylinder.
3. Select the required time in the highlighted minutes
and seconds fields using the rotary cylinder.
4. Press the rotary cylinder to conclude the input process.
Once you have switched back to the basic display, press
the CLEAR button first with the stopwatch halted, so
that the stopwatch switches to the “Timer” function; see
top right in the next illustration.
Program description: basic settings – fixed-wing model
GRAUBELE
#01
9.6V
5:32h
stop 10:01
0:00
flt
«normal »
K78 IFS
When you operate the assigned switch, the stopwatch
starts from the set initial value, counting down (“Timer
function”). When the set time has elapsed, the timer
does not stop, but continues to run so that you can read
off the time elapsed after reaching zero. To make this
clear, the over-run time is shown highlighted (inverse
video).
Sequence of sounds
30 sec. before zero: triple beep
single beep every two seconds
20 sec. before zero: double beep
single beep every two seconds
10 sec. before zero: single beep
single beep every second
5 sec. before zero: single beep every second at higher
rate
zero: longer beep; display switches to
inverse video
The “alarm timer” is reset by pressing the CLEAR button
once you have halted the timer.
Note:
A count-down timer is indicated in the basic display by
a flashing colon (:) between the minutes field and the
seconds field.
Phase 2 / Phase 3
clock
phase 2
phase 3
train./stu.
For more information on Trainer systems please refer to
page 122.
10:01
C2
takeoff
speed
1QR
SEL
When you select “phase 2” and / or “phase 3”, you
will see SEL at the bottom edge of the screen. Press
ENTER or the rotary cylinder, and the current setting is
shown highlighted. If you do not wish to use the default
names, use the rotary cylinder to select a suitable name
from the pre-sets. Press the rotary cylinder to return to
the function line.
using the rotary cylinMove to the switch symbol
der, then press the rotary cylinder again briefly. A switch
can be assigned to the flight phase as described on
page 33.
For more information on flight phase programming
please refer to page 70, in the section entitled »Phase
trim«.
Trainer / student
clock
phase 2
phase 3
train./stu.
10:01
C2
takeoff
speed
1QR
SEL
In this menu line you can assign a “transfer switch” for
Trainer (teacher / pupil) mode operations, after pressing
the rotary cylinder or ENTER, as described on page 33.
The switch is used to transfer control from one transmitter to the other.
Receiver output
For maximum flexibility in terms of receiver socket assignment, the mx-16iFS software provides the means
to swap over the servo outputs 1 to max. 8; this is
carried out on the second page of the “Receiver output”
sub-menu.
phase 2
phase 3
train./stu.
receiv out
takeoff
speed
1QR
SEL
Press the rotary cylinder or the ENTER button to move
to the next page of the display. Here you can assign
the “control channels” for servos 1 … 8 to any receiver
output you wish to use. However, please note that the
display in »servo display« – which you can reach by
pressing the rotary cylinder from the basic display – refers exclusively to the “control channels”, i. e. the outputs
are not swapped over.
S
S
S
S
1
2
3
4
SEL
output
output
output
output
1
2
3
4
default sequence.
Please note that any subsequent changes to servo
settings, such as servo travel, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers
etc., must be carried out according to the original
(default) receiver socket sequence.
Note:
It is also possible to swap over the outputs of XR-series
receivers at the receiver itself, as described on page 26
and in the instructions supplied with the actual receiver.
However, we strongly recommend that you use only one
of the two options, as a combination will soon lead to
confusion.
Typical applications:
• If you wish to use a smaller receiver with six or even
just four servo sockets, it may be necessary to re-assign the receiver sockets in order to be able to operate a second camber-changing flap, a second aileron
servo or a speed controller.
• It may also prove necessary to swap servos for Trainer mode operations, if you are using a model set up
for another make of equipment fitted with a Graupner | iFS RF module, to avoid having to re-connect
the servos at the receiver.
With the rotary cylinder held pressed in, select the servo
/ output combination you wish to change, then press
ENTER or the rotary cylinder. Now you can assign the
desired servo(s) to the selected output using the rotary
cylinder … or alternatively press CLEAR to revert to the
Program description: basic settings – fixed-wing model
49
Basic settings
Basic model-specific settings for model helicopters
roll
roll
tail rotor
pitch axis
throttle
»MODE 3« (Throttle at right stick) »MODE 4« (Throttle at left stick)
Motor/Pitch
throttle
pitch axis
throttle
tail rotor
pitch axis
throttle
tail rotor
pitch axis
roll
50
throttle
tail rotor
Use the rotary cylinder to select the first character in
the symbol field. A brief press on the rotary cylinder (or
turning it when held in) moves to the next position in the
name, at which point you can again select a character.
Pressing CLEAR inserts a space at that point.
pitch axis
pitch axis
throttle
roll
model name STAR
throttle
roll
0123456789 : ;
?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
pitch axis
tail rotor
Press ENTER or the rotary cylinder to move to the next
screen page (
), where you can select characters
to assemble the model name. You can enter up to nine
characters to define a model name:
»MODE 1« (Throttle at right stick) »MODE 2« (Throttle at left stick)
tail rotor
1
1 servo
left
roll
model name
stick mode
swashplate
rotor direct
roll
Model name
Stick mode
Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the
principal control functions of a model helicopter on
the two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are roll,
pitch-axis, tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch. Which
of these options you select depends on your individual
preferences and flying style.
tail rotor
base sett.
contr set.
heli mixer
tail rotor
mod.mem.
servo set.
D/R expo
free mixer
You can move to any character position within the input
field using the rotary cylinder pressed in; it is indicated
by a double arrow <––> above the input field while the
rotary cylinder is held pressed in.
The model name entered in this way appears in the
basic display, and also in the sub-menus of the “Model
memory” menu point.
roll
Before you start programming specific parameters,
some basic settings must be entered which apply only
to the currently active model memory. Select the »base
sett.« (Basic model settings) menu with the rotary cylinder, and press ENTER or the rotary cylinder:
pitch axis
When you select “stick mode” with the rotary cylinder
pressed in, you will see SEL at the bottom edge of the
screen:
Program description: basic settings – model helicopter
model name STARLET
1
stick mode
swashplate
1 servo
rotor direct
left
SEL
Press ENTER or the rotary cylinder, and the current
stick mode is highlighted (inverse video – black background). Now use the rotary cylinder to select one of the
options 1 to 4.
Pressing CLEAR resets the function to stick mode “1”.
Swashplate type
model name STARLET
1
stick mode
swashplate
1 servo
rotor direct
left
SEL
You will require a particular program variant to suit the
number of servos which operate the collective pitch
function.
Select “swashplate” with the rotary cylinder pressed
in, and SEL appears at the bottom edge of the screen.
Press the rotary cylinder. The current number of collective pitch servos is highlighted on the screen. You can
now determine the required variant using the rotary
cylinder:
„1 servo“:
The swashplate is tilted by one roll servo
and one pitch-axis servo. Collective pitch
is controlled by one separate servo.
The »swashp.mix« menu point is suppressed in the multi-function menu if
you select “1 servo” as the swashplate
type. This is because model helicopters
with only one collective pitch servo are
controlled without transmitter mixers for
the swashplate functions collective pitch,
pitch-axis and roll.
„2 servo“:
The swashplate is moved axially by two
roll servos for collective pitch control;
pitch-axis control is de-coupled by a
mechanical compensating rocker (HEIM
mechanics).
„3sv (2roll)“: A symmetrical three-point swashplate
linkage using three linkage points arranged equally at 120°, actuated by one
pitch-axis servo (front or rear) and two
roll servos (left and right). For collective
pitch control all three servos move the
swashplate axially.
„3sv (2nick)“: A symmetrical three-point linkage as
above, but rotated through 90°, i. e. one
roll servo on one side, and two pitch-axis
servos front and rear.
„4sv (90°)“: Four-point swashplate linkage using two
roll and two pitch-axis servos.
CLEAR resets the swashplate type to “1 servo”.
Note:
With the exception of the “1 servo” pre-set, the swashplate mixer ratios are set in the »swashp.mix« menu.
Swashplate type: 1 servo
Direction of rotation of main rotor
model name STARLET
1
stick mode
swashplate
3sv(2roll)
rotor direct
left
SEL
2
Swashplate type: 2 servos
In the “rotor direction” line you enter the direction of
rotation of the main rotor using the rotary cylinder, after
pressing ENTER or the rotary cylinder:
“right”: the main rotor spins clockwise as viewed from
above.
“left”:
the main rotor spins anti-clockwise as viewed
from above.
CLEAR switches to “left”.
2
1
Swashplate type: 3 servos (2 nick (pitch-axis))
1
3
2
Swashplate type: 3 servos (2 roll)
2
3
right-hand
rotation
1
The program requires this information in order to set up
the mixers to work in the correct “sense”; this applies to
the mixers which compensate for rotor torque and motor
power. You will find these in the »heli mixer« menu:
Pitch
Ch1 ¼ throttle
Ch1 ¼ tail rotor
Program description: basic settings – model helicopter 51
Swashplate type: 4 servos (90°) 2 pitch-axis / 2 roll
2
5
3
1
left-hand
rotation
(Collective) pitch min
stick mode
swashplate
rotor direct
pitch min
1
3sv(2roll)
left
front
SEL
At this point you can set up the direction of operation of
the throttle / collective pitch stick to suit your preference:
press the rotary cylinder briefly, then use the rotary
cylinder to select the appropriate setting. This setting is
crucial to the correct operation of all the other options
in the helicopter program which affect the throttle and
collective pitch functions, i. e. the throttle curve, idle trim,
tail rotor mixer etc..
Note:
• The Ch 1 trim always affects the throttle servo only.
• By default what is known as the “throttle limiter” is set
(see page 62); this limits the travel of the throttle servo in the direction of maximum throttle, acting separately from the collective pitch servos. This point can
be programmed using the “Lim” input in the »contr
set.« menu.
Timers
Two timers are shown in the basic display: one stopwatch and one flight timer.
STARLET
#02
9.6V
5:36h
Pitch
0:00
stop
0:00
flt
«normal »
K78 IFS
A physical switch or a control switch – e. g. the control
switch C3 located on the throttle limiter – can be assigned to these two timers in the “timers” line …
swashplate
rotor direct
pitch min
clock
The meaning is as follows:
“front”: minimum collective pitch when the collective
pitch stick (Ch 1) is “forward” (away from you);
“rear”: minimum collective pitch when the collective
pitch stick (Ch 1) is “back” (towards you).
Pressing CLEAR sets the collective pitch min. position
to “forward”.
52
3sv(2roll)
left
front
0:00
SEL SEL
… using the switch symbol on the right-hand side. The
assigned switch starts both timers, and also halts the
stopwatch.
The method of assigning a physical switch or a control
switch is described on page 33.
The flight timer always starts simultaneously with the
stopwatch, but continues to run even when the stop-
Program description: basic settings – model helicopter
watch is halted (switched off). It can only be stopped by
pressing ESC with the stopwatch halted.
Once stopped, pressing CLEAR resets both timers to
the initial value.
Switching between “count-up” and “count-down”
Count-up timer (stopwatch function)
If you assign a switch and start the stopwatch with the
initial value of “0:00”, the timer runs up until the maximum of 999 minutes and 59 seconds, then re-starts at
0:00.
Count-down timer (alarm timer function)
You can use the left-hand SEL field to select a starting time within the range 0 to 180 minutes; using the
right-hand SEL field the range is 0 to 59 seconds. Any
combination of times can also be selected.
(CLEAR = “0” or “00”.)
3sv(2roll)
swashplate
left
rotor direct
front
pitch min
clock
C3
10:01
SEL SEL
Procedure
1. Select the SEL field with the rotary cylinder.
2. Press the rotary cylinder.
3. Select the required time in the highlighted minutes
and seconds fields using the rotary cylinder.
4. Press the rotary cylinder to conclude the input process.
Once you have switched back to the basic display, press
the CLEAR button first with the stopwatch halted, so
that the stopwatch switches to the “Timer” function; see
top right in the next illustration.
STARLET
#02
9.6V
5:38h
stop 10:01
0:00
flt
«normal »
K78 IFS
When you operate the assigned switch, the stopwatch
starts from the set initial value, counting down (“Timer
function”). When the set time has elapsed, the timer
does not stop, but continues to run so that you can read
off the time elapsed after reaching zero. To make this
clear, the over-run time is shown highlighted (inverse
video).
Sequence of sounds
30 sec. before zero: triple beep
single beep every two seconds
20 sec. before zero: double beep
single beep every two seconds
10 sec. before zero: single beep
single beep every second
5 sec. before zero: single beep every second at higher
rate
zero: longer beep; display switches to
inverse video
The “alarm timer” is reset by pressing the CLEAR button
once you have halted the timer.
Note:
A count-down timer is indicated in the basic display by
a flashing colon (:) between the minutes field and the
seconds field.
Phase 2
Trainer / student
rotor direct
left
pitch min
front
clock
C3
10:01
phase 2
hover
SEL SEL
clock
phase 2
autorotat.
train. / stu.
Auto-rotation
front
C3
10:01
hover
SEL SEL
The name “Auto-rotation” is permanently assigned to
Phase 3, and cannot be altered. The only available option is to assign a switch to it using the switch symbol at
bottom right of the screen.
For more information on programming flight phases
please refer to the »heli mixer« section starting on page
78.
Note:
The “Auto-rotation” flight phase ALWAYS has precedence over all other flight phases.
C3
SEL SEL
In the “phase 2” line you use the SEL field to select a
suitable name from the six default names provided,
using the rotary cylinder. You can also assign a switch
using the switch symbol at bottom right.
More on the meaning of flight phases and how to
program them can be found in the section entitled “Flight
phase-specific mixers for collective pitch, throttle and tail
rotor” starting on page 78.
pitch min
clock
phase 2
autorotat.
10:01
hover
In this menu line you can assign a “transfer switch” for
Trainer (teacher / pupil) mode operations, after pressing
the rotary cylinder or ENTER, as described on page 33.
The switch is used to transfer control from one transmitter to the other.
For more information on Trainer systems please refer to
page 122.
Receiver output
For maximum flexibility in terms of receiver socket assignment, the mx-16iFS software provides the means
to swap over the servo outputs 1 to max. 8; this is
carried out on the second page of the “Receiver output”
sub-menu.
phase 2
autorotat.
train. / stu.
receiv out
hover
vorn
SEL
Press the rotary cylinder or the ENTER button to move
to the next page of the display. Here you can assign
the “control channels” for servos 1 … 8 to any receiver
output you wish to use. However, please note that the
display in »servo display« – which you can reach by
pressing the rotary cylinder from the basic display – refers exclusively to the “control channels”, i. e. the outputs
Program description: basic settings – model helicopter
53
are not swapped over.
With the rotary cylinder held pressed in, select the servo
/ output combination you wish to change, then press
ENTER or the rotary cylinder. Now you can assign the
desired servo(s) to the selected output using the rotary
cylinder … or alternatively press CLEAR to revert to the
default sequence.
Please note that any subsequent changes to servo
settings, such as servo travel, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers
etc., must be carried out according to the original
(default) receiver socket sequence.
Note:
It is also possible to swap over the outputs of XR-series
receivers at the receiver itself, as described on page 26
and in the instructions supplied with the actual receiver.
However, we strongly recommend that you use only one
of the two options, as a combination will soon lead to
confusion.
Typical applications:
• In the helicopter program of the mx-16iFS the outputs for one collective pitch servo and the throttle
servo have been interchanged compared to all earlier GRAUPNER/JR mc-systems. The throttle servo is
now assigned to receiver output “6” and the collective
pitch servo to output “1”. You may therefore wish to
retain the earlier configuration.
• It may also prove necessary to swap servos for Trainer mode operations, if you are using a model set up
for another make of equipment fitted with a Graupner | iFS RF module, to avoid having to re-connect
the servos at the receiver.
54
Program description: basic settings – model helicopter
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
6
2
3
4
5
1
7
8
SEL
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For your notes
55
Servo settings
Servo direction, centre, travel
S1
S2
S3
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
trav +
rev cent
SYM ASY
SEL SEL
In this menu you can adjust parameters which only affect the servo connected to a particular receiver output,
namely the direction of servo rotation, neutral point and
servo travel. Always start with the servo setting in the
left-hand column.
Basic procedure:
1. Select the relevant servo (1 to 8) with the rotary cylinder held pressed in.
2. Use the rotary cylinder to select SEL, SYM or ASY in
the bottom line, prior to making the adjustments required.
3. Press ENTER or the rotary cylinder: the corresponding input field is highlighted (inverse video).
4. Set the appropriate value using the rotary cylinder.
5. Finally press ENTER or the rotary cylinder again to
conclude the input process.
Important:
The numbers in the servo designations refer to the
receiver output socket to which a particular servo(s) is
connected, assuming that these have not been swapped
over. This means that changing the stick mode does not
affect the numbering (i. e. receiver socket sequence) of
the servos.
56
Program description: servo settings
Column 2 “rev”
The direction of servo rotation can be adjusted to suit
the actual installation in your model. This means that
you don’t need to concern yourself with servo directions
when installing the mechanical linkages in the model,
as you can reverse them as and when necessary. The
direction of rotation is indicated by the symbols “=>” and
“<=”. Be sure to set the direction of servo rotation before
you make adjustments to the remaining options!
Pressing CLEAR resets the direction of rotation to “=>”.
normal
normal
reversed
Column 3 “cent”
The facility to offset the servo travel centre is intended
for adjusting servos whose centre setting is not standard
(servo centre point at 1.5 ms), and also for minor adjustments, e. g. when fine-tuning the neutral position of the
model’s control surfaces.
The neutral position can be shifted over the range
-125% to +125% of normal servo travel, within the maximum servo travel of ±150%, regardless of the trim lever
position and any mixers you have set up. The setting
affects the associated servo directly, independently of all
other trim and mixer settings.
However, please note that an extreme shift of the servo’s
neutral point may result in servo travel to one side of
neutral only, as total servo travel is limited to ±150% for
both electronic and mechanical reasons.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to “0%”.
Ser vo travel
reversed
tre adjustment
Cen
+1
%
25
25
%
-1
Column 4 “- trav +”
In this column you can adjust servo travel symmetrically
or asymmetrically (different each side of neutral). The
adjustment range is 0 … 150% of normal servo travel.
The reference point for the set values is the setting in
the “Centre” column.
To set a “symmetrical” travel, i. e. to adjust travel equally
on both sides of neutral, select SYM; select ASY to set
asymmetrical travel. In the latter case move the associated transmitter control (stick, proportional rotary knob
or switch) to the appropriate end-point; when you press
the rotary cylinder the highlighted servo travel field
switches between the left field (negative direction) and
the right field (positive direction).
Pressing CLEAR resets the changed parameter to
100%.
Servo travel
Important:
In contrast to the »contr set.« menu, this setting affects
the servo directly, regardless of how the control signal
for this servo is generated, i. e. either directly by a stick
channel, or by means of any type of mixer function.
The graph alongside
shows an example of
asymmetrical servo
travel, with a setting of
-50% and +150%.
Transmitter control travel
Program description: servo settings
57
Transmitter control settings
Basic procedures for assigning transmitter controls and switches
I5
I6
I7
empty + 100% + 100%
empty + 100% + 100%
empty + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
the “supplementary” transmitter controls for any task
you like, and that you are not required deliberately to
“program away” the transmitter controls which are not
required for a particular model.
Any superfluous transmitter control will have an
effect on your model if you operate it by mistake –
unless it is inactive, i. e. unless you have assigned
‘no function’ to it.
That is why you can select these “supplementary” transmitter controls with complete freedom in the “Transmitter
control settings” menu and assign them to any function
input (see page 32) you like, as this method ensures
that the transmitter meets your own requirements
exactly. This also means that each of these transmitter
controls can be set to operate several function inputs
simultaneously. For example, the same toggle switch
SW X, which you assign to an input in this menu, can
also be assigned as the On / OFF switch controlling the
“clocks” in the »base sett.« menu.
In addition to the two dual-axis stick units for the control
functions 1 to 4, the mx-16iFS is fitted as standard with
a range of supplementary controls:
• Two INC / DEC buttons: CTRL 5 and 6 (“transmitter
controls 5 … 6”)
• One three-position switch: SW 6/7 (assigned to “ctrl8”
in this menu)
• One rotary proportional knob: CTRL 7 (“transmitter
control 7”)
• One push-button: SW 4 / PB 8 (“SW 4” or “SW 8”)
• Three two-position switches: SW 1 to SW 3 (“SW 1
… 3”)
The two dual-axis stick units directly affect the servos
Note:
connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 (assuming that you
The current positions of the INC / DEC buttons (CTRL
have set up a newly initialised model memory with the
5 + 6) assigned to inputs 5 … 8 are stored separately
model type “Fixed-wing model”). In contrast, the “supplementary” transmitter controls listed above are inactive for each memory, i. e. the settings are not lost when you
change flight phases or switch to a different model.
when the transmitter is in its default state (as delivered).
As already mentioned on page 14, this means that the
The basic procedure
transmitter in its basic form only controls servos con1. Select the appropriate input E5 … E8 with the rotary
nected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 using the primary
cylinder held pressed in.
sticks – even when you have initialised a new model
2.
Use the rotary cylinder to select SEL, SYM or ASY
memory with the model type “Fixed-wing model”. Any
so that you can carry out the adjustments you wish
servos connected to receiver sockets 5 … 8 simply stay
to make.
at their centre point when you operate the associated
3.
Press the rotary cylinder: the input field you wish to
transmitter controls.
modify is highlighted.
This may seem rather inconvenient at first sight, but
4. Operate the transmitter control you wish to use, and
it is the only way to ensure that you can select any of
58 Program description: transmitter control settings – fixed-wing model
set the desired value using the rotary cylinder.
5. Press the rotary cylinder to conclude the input process and return to the function field.
Column 2 “Assigning transmitter controls and
switches”
Select one of the inputs with the rotary cylinder held
pressed in.
Use the rotary cylinder to select SEL, or (if SEL is
already highlighted), press the rotary cylinder briefly to
move to the assignment facility:
empty + 100% + 100%
I5
+ 100% + 100%
E6
operate desired
+ 100% + 100%
frei
E7
switch or control
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
Move the appropriate transmitter control (CTRL 5 to 7), or
operate the selected switch (SW 1 to 4, 6/7, 8). Note that
the transmitter needs some “beeps” to detect the two INC
/ DEC buttons (CTRL 5 and 6) and the rotary proportional
control, i. e. they need to be operated for longer than the
other controls. If the travel is not sufficient for the transmitter to detect it, move the control in the opposite direction.
If you assign one of the two-position switches, then this
control channel works like an On / Off switch. It is then
possible to switch to and fro between two end-point values using this simple switch, e. g. motor ON / OFF. The
three-position switch SW 6/7, which you will find in the
»contr set.« menu as “ctrl8”, provides a centre position
in addition to the two end-points.
Pressing the CLEAR button with the switch assignment
activated – see illustration above – resets the input to
“empty”.
Tips:
• When assigning the switches please take care to set
them to the appropriate direction of travel, and ensure that all inputs not required are left at or set to
“empty”, to eliminate the possibility of errors if unused transmitter controls are operated accidentally.
• You can alter the effective end-points of an assigned
switch by adjusting servo travel as described in the
next section.
The screen now displays either the transmitter control
number or the switch number, followed by a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operation, e. g.:
I5
I6
I7
+ 100% + 100%
1
ctrl7 + 100% + 100%
empty + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
Column 3 “- trv +”
Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to select one of the
inputs 5 to 8.
Use the rotary cylinder to select SYM or ASY in the
“- trv +” column, and press the rotary cylinder briefly to
activate travel adjustment. You can now use the rotary
cylinder to set the control travel within the range -125%
to +125%, either symmetrically (SYM) to both sides …,
I5
I6
I7
inputs, i. e. all servos which are affected by that transmitter control.
+ 100% + 100%
1
ctrl7 + 111% + 111%
empty + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
… or asymmetrically (ASY):
I5
I6
I7
+ 100% + 100%
1
ctrl7 + 88% + 111%
empty + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
If you wish to make asymmetrical adjustments, you must
move the transmitter control or switch in the appropriate
direction before altering the setting. When the field is
highlighted, you can change the setting.
Negative and positive parameter values are possible;
this enables you to set the appropriate direction of
movement of the transmitter control to suit your model.
Pressing CLEAR resets the control travel in the highlighted field to 100%.
Important:
In contrast to servo travel adjustments, changing the
transmitter travel setting affects all mixer and coupling
Program description: transmitter control settings – fixed-wing model
59
Transmitter control settings
Basic procedures for assigning transmitter controls and switches
empty + 100% + 100%
I5
thr empty + 100% + 100%
gyr empty + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
the “supplementary” transmitter controls for any task
you like, and that you are not required deliberately to
“program away” the transmitter controls which are not
required for a particular model.
Unless it is inactive, any superfluous transmitter
control will have an effect on your model if you
operate it by mistake, i. e. unless you have assigned
‘no function’ to it.
That is why you can select these “supplementary” transmitter controls with complete freedom in the “Transmitter
control settings” menu, and assign them to any function
input (see page 32) you like, as this method ensures
that the transmitter meets your own requirements
exactly. This also means that each of these transmitter
controls can be set to operate several function inputs simultaneously. For example, the same toggle switch SW
X which you assign to an input in this menu, can also be
assigned as the On / OFF switch controlling the “clocks”
in the »base sett.« menu.
In addition to the two dual-axis stick units for the control
functions 1 to 4, the mx-16iFS is fitted as standard with
a range of supplementary controls:
• Two INC / DEC buttons: CTRL 5 and 6 (“transmitter
controls 5 … 6”)
• One three-position switch: SW 6/7 (assigned to “ctrl8”
in this menu)
• One rotary proportional knob: CTRL 7 (“transmitter
control 7”)
• One push-button: SW 4 / PB 8 (“SW 4” or “SW 8”)
• Three two-position switches: SW 1 to SW 3 (“SW 1
… 3”)
The two dual-axis stick units directly affect servos
Notes:
connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and 6 (assuming
that you have set up a newly initialised model memory
• The current positions of the INC / DEC buttons
with the model type “Helicopter”). In contrast, the “sup(CTRL 5 + 6) assigned to inputs 5 … 8 are stored
plementary” transmitter controls listed above are inactive
separately for each memory, i. e. the settings are not
when the transmitter is in its default state (as delivered).
lost when you change flight phases or switch to a difThe exception is the rotary proportional knob CTRL 7
ferent model.
(throttle limiter), which acts upon servo 6 by default.
• Input 6 must always be left “empty” for helicopter apAs already mentioned on page 14, this means that the
plications; for more details see the section entitled
transmitter in its basic form only controls servos con“Throttle” on page 62.
nected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 using the primary
The basic procedure
sticks. Any servos connected to receiver sockets 5, 7
1. Select the appropriate input I5, (gas), gyr, I8 or Lim
and 8 simply stay at their centre point when you operate
(Limit) with the rotary cylinder pressed in.
the associated transmitter controls.
2.
Use the rotary cylinder to select SEL, SYM or ASY
This may seem rather inconvenient at first sight, but
so that you can carry out the adjustments you wish
it is the only way to ensure that you can select any of
60 Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
to make.
3. Press the rotary cylinder: the input field you want to
modify is now highlighted.
4. Operate the transmitter control you wish to use, and
set the desired value using the rotary cylinder.
5. Press the rotary cylinder to conclude the input process.
Column 2 “Assigning transmitter controls and
switches”
Select one of the inputs with the rotary cylinder held
pressed in.
Use the rotary cylinder to select SEL, or (if SEL is
already highlighted), press the rotary cylinder briefly to
move to the assignment facility:
empty + 100% + 100%
I5
+ 100% + 100%
E6
operate desired
+ 100% + 100%
frei
E7
switch or control
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
Move the appropriate transmitter control (CTRL 5 to 7), or
operate the selected switch (SW 1 to 4, 6/7, 8). Note that
the transmitter needs some “beeps” to detect the two INC
/ DEC buttons (CTRL 5 and 6) and the rotary proportional
control, i. e. they need to be operated for longer than the
other controls. If the travel is not sufficient for the transmitter to detect it, move the control in the opposite direction.
If you assign one of the two-position switches, then this
control channel works like an On / Off switch. It is then
possible to switch to and fro between two end-point values using this simple switch, e. g. motor ON / OFF. The
three-position switch SW 6/7, which you will find in the
»contr set.« menu as “ctrl8”, provides a centre position
in addition to the two end-points.
Pressing the CLEAR button with the switch assignment
activated – see illustration above – resets the input to
“empty”.
Tips:
• When assigning the switches please take care to set
them to the appropriate direction of travel, and ensure that all inputs not required are left at or set to
“empty”, to eliminate the possibility of errors if unused transmitter controls are operated accidentally.
• You can alter the effective end-points of an assigned
switch by adjusting servo travel as described in the
next section.
The screen now displays either the transmitter control
number or the switch number, followed by a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operation, e. g.:
+ 100% + 100%
3
I5
thr empty + 100% + 100%
gyr ct rl6 + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
Column 3 “- trv +”
Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to select one of the
inputs I5, throttle, gyr, I8 or lim.
Use the rotary cylinder to select SYM or ASY in the
“- trv +” column, and press the rotary cylinder to activate
travel adjustment. You can now use the rotary cylinder to
set the control travel within the range -125% to +125%,
either symmetrically (SYM) to both sides …,
inputs, i. e. all servos which are affected by that transmitter control.
+ 100% + 100%
I5
3
thr empty + 100% + 100%
gyr ctrl6 + 88% + 88%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
… or asymmetrically (ASY).
+ 100% + 100%
3
I5
thr empty + 100% + 100%
gyr ctrl6 + 88% + 111%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
If you wish to make asymmetrical adjustments, you must
move the transmitter control or switch in the appropriate
direction before altering the setting. When the field is
highlighted, you can change the setting.
Negative and positive parameter values are possible;
this enables you to set the appropriate direction of
movement of the transmitter control to suit your model.
Pressing CLEAR resets the control travel in the highlighted field to 100%.
Important:
In contrast to servo travel adjustments, changing the
transmitter travel setting affects all mixer and coupling
Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
61
Throttle limit function
“Lim” input
“Throttle”
+ 100% + 100%
3
I5
thr empty + 100% + 100%
gyr ctrl6 + 88% + 111%
tr v +
ASY
SYM
SEL
In principle all transmitter controls (rotary proportional
knob, INC / DEC buttons) and switches present on the
transmitter can be assigned to the individual inputs
within the Helicopter program.
However, please note that some inputs available in the
“Transmitter control settings” menu are already pre-defined for helicopter-specific functions, and for this reason
cannot be used without restriction.
For example, the receiver sequence printed on page 41
shows that the throttle servo (or the speed controller of
an electric-powered model helicopter) must be connected to receiver output “6”, i. e. control channel “6” is
reserved for motor speed control.
However, in contrast to a fixed-wing aircraft, the throttle
servo or speed controller is not directly controlled by the
throttle stick or any other transmitter control, but via a
complex mixer system – see »heli mixer« menu, starting on page 78. The “throttle limit function” (described
on the next page) also has an influence on this mixer
system.
Assigning a transmitter control or switch in the “Throttle” line, or its supplementary control signal, would only
unnecessarily “confuse” this complex mixer system.
For this reason the “Throttle” input MUST always
be left “empty” when you are programming a model
helicopter.
62
„Gyro“
Meaning and application of “throttle limit”
+ 100% + 100%
3
I5
thr empty + 100% + 100%
gyr ctrl6 + 88% + 111%
tr v +
ASY
SYM
SEL
If the gyro you are using features infinitely variable gain
control, then you can pre-set the static gyro effect by
setting an “offset” within the range ±125%, separately for
each flight phase, in the “Gyro” line of the »heli mixer«
menu – see the section starting on page 78.
Once you have entered these pre-defined – static – gain
settings (if need be set separately for each flight phase
in the »heli mixer« menu), you can use a transmitter
control such as one of the two INC / DEC buttons (CTRL
5 or 6) to vary gyro gain around the set “offset point”;
all you have to do is assign that transmitter control in
the “Gyro” line of this menu: in the centre position of
the transmitter control this corresponds to the setting
selected in the »heli mixer« menu (see page 78). If
the transmitter control is moved from this centre point
in the direction of full travel, gyro gain is increased;
towards the opposite end-point it is reduced. This is
a fast, simple method of fine-tuning gyro gain when
the model is in flight – perhaps to suit varying weather
conditions – or alternatively to find the optimum setting.
In software terms you can also limit the gain range to
both sides by restricting the transmitter control travel.
However, please be sure to read the set-up notes
provided with your gyro before carrying out these
adjustments, as you could render your helicopter
uncontrollable if you make a mistake.
Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
gyr ctrl6 + 88% + 111%
empty + 100% + 100%
I8
lim ctrl7 + 100% + 100%
tr v +
ASY
SEL
SYM
As mentioned previously under “Throttle”, the power
output of the engine or motor of a model helicopter is
not controlled directly using the throttle (Ch 1) stick – in
contrast to fixed-wing model aircraft. Instead it is controlled indirectly by the throttle curve settings which you set
up in the »heli mixer« menu. Alternatively the throttle
is controlled by the speed controller if the unit you are
using is a governor or regulator.
Note:
Naturally it is possible to set up different throttle curves
to suit different stages of flight using flight phase programming.
However, this certainly means that a helicopter’s motor
never gets anywhere near its idle speed during “normal”
flying, so it is impossible to start or stop the motor easily
unless some other means is used. This applies whether
a speed governor or a conventional throttle control
system is in use.
The “Throttle limiter” function solves this problem in an
elegant manner: a separate transmitter control – as
standard this is the rotary proportional control CTRL 7
at top left of the transmitter – is employed to limit the
setting of the throttle servo or the speed controller to any
speed you like, which means that you can throttle right
back to the idle position for starting the motor. In the
other case, the throttle servo can only follow the throttle
curve, and therefore reach its full-throttle setting, if you
release full servo travel using the throttle limit control.
That is why the “Lim” input is reserved in the Helicopter
program for the “Throttle limiter” function.
For this reason the right-hand positive value in the
“Travel” column must be large enough to ensure that it
does not limit the full-throttle setting available via the
Ch 1 stick when the control is at its maximum position. Usually this means a value in the range +100%
to +125%. The left-hand negative value in the “Travel”
column of the input should be set in such a way that the
throttle is closed completely when the digital Ch 1 trim
is used, so that you can reliably stop the motor. For the
same reason you should leave this value of the throttle
limit slider at +100%, at least for the time being.
This variable “limiting” of throttle travel provides a
convenient means of starting and stopping the motor.
However, it also gives an additional level of safety if, for
example, you have to carry your helicopter to the flight
line with the motor running: you simply move the control
to its minimum position, and this prevents any accidental
movement of the Ch 1 stick affecting the throttle servo.
If the carburettor is too far open (or the speed controller
not at “stop”) when you switch the transmitter on, you
will hear an audible warning, and the screen displays
the message:
throttle
too
high !
Important note:
Setting the “Lim” function input to “empty” does not
switch off the Throttle limit function; it just switches
the limiter to “half-throttle”.
Tip:
You can call up the »Servo display« menu to check the
influence of the throttle limit slider. Move to this menu by
briefly pressing the rotary cylinder from the basic transmitter display. Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls
the throttle servo on the mx-16iFS.
Basic idle setting
Start by turning the throttle limiter – by default the
rotary proportional knob CTRL 7 located at top left of
the transmitter – clockwise to its end-point. Move the
throttle / collective pitch stick to the maximum position,
and ensure that a standard throttle curve is active in the
“Channel 1 ¼ throttle” sub-menu of the …
»heli mixer« (page 78)
… menu. If you have already altered the standard
throttle curve which is present when you first initialise a
model memory, then this should be reset to the values
“Point 1 = -100%”, “Point 3 = 0%” and “Point 5 = +100%”
– at least temporarily.
ch1
thro
0%
input
0%
output
0%
point 3
normal
Note:
Since the throttle trim lever has no effect when the throttle limiter is open, its position is not relevant at this point.
Now – without starting the glow motor – adjust the
mechanical linkage of the throttle servo so that the
carburettor barrel is fully open; if necessary, carry out
fine-tuning using the travel setting for servo 6 in the
»servo set.« menu.
Now close the throttle limiter completely by turning the
rotary proportional knob CTRL 7 anti-clockwise to its
end-point. Use the trim lever of the throttle / collective
pitch stick to move the trim position marker to the motor
OFF position (see illustration in the centre column of the
next page).
Note:
In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed, the position of the throttle / collective pitch stick is not relevant;
it can therefore be left in the maximum collective pitch
position, i. e. the throttle linkage can be adjusted between full-throttle (throttle limiter open) and “motor OFF”
(throttle limiter closed) using just the throttle limiter.
Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the mechanical throttle linkage so that the carburettor is just fully
closed. However, do check carefully that the throttle
servo is not stalled at either of its extreme end-points
(full-throttle / motor OFF).
To complete this basic set-up you still have to adjust the
idle trim range to coincide with point “1” of the throttle
curve. This is accomplished by setting point “1” of the
“Ch 1 ¼ throttle” mixer in the »heli mixer« menu to a
value of about -65 to -70%:
ch1
thro
input
–100%
– 66%
output
point 1 – 66%
To check that the setting is exact, i. e. that there is a
seamless transition from idle trim to the throttle curve,
you need to close the throttle limiter and move the
Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
63
collective pitch stick to and fro slightly at the minimum
end-point. When you do this, the throttle servo must not
move! In any case fine-tuning must be carried out with
the model flying.
The motor is always started with the throttle limiter
completely closed; this has the effect that the idle speed
is controlled solely using the trim lever of the throttle /
collective pitch stick.
Throttle limit in conjunction with the digital trim
When used with the throttle limit control, the Ch 1 trim
places a marker at the set idle position of the motor; at
this point the motor can be stopped using the trim. If the
trim is in its end-range (see screen-shot down in this
column), then a single click immediately takes you back
to the marker, i. e. to the pre-set idle position (see also
page 24).
The cut-off trim only acts as idle trim on the throttle limit
in the bottom half of the travel of the throttle limit control,
i. e. the marker is only set and stored within this range.
Current
trim position
ELE
h
ELE
h
Throttle limit control
CTRL 7
Last idle position
For this reason the Ch 1 trim display is also completely
suppressed as soon as the throttle limit control is moved
to the right of the centre position.
64
Throttle limit contro
CTRL 7
Note:
Since this trim function is only effective in the “Motor off”
direction, the illustration above changes if you alter the
transmitter control direction for the collective pitch minimum position of the Ch 1 stick from “forward” (reflected
in the picture above) to “back” in the “Collective pitch
min.” line of the »base sett.« menu. In the same way the
effects shown in the illustration swap sides if you change
the stick mode from collective pitch right (reflected in the
pictures above) to collective pitch left in the “Stick mode”
line of the »base sett.« menu; see page 50.
Trim at motor
OFF position
stop
flt
«norm
K78
stop
f lt
«norm
K78
Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter
For your notes
65
Dual Rate / Expo
Switchable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder
66
The basic set-up procedure
1. Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to select the desired line: “aile”, “elev” or “rudd”.
2. Use the rotary cylinder to select SEL under the
DUAL or EXPO column, so that you can make adjustments at that point.
3. Press the rotary cylinder. The appropriate input field
is now highlighted.
4. Set the desired value using the rotary cylinder.
5. Press the rotary cylinder to conclude the input process and return to the function field.
Program description: Dual Rate / Expo – fixed-wing model
Dual Rate function
If you wish to switch between two possible D/R settings,
select the
symbol and assign a physical switch as
described in the section “Assigning switches and control
switches” on page 33.
aile
elev
push
irudd
nto
0%
100%
100%
desired 0%
switch
100%
p
o s i t i o n 0%
ON
DUAL EXPO
SEL
SEL
Select the left-hand SEL field to change the Dual Rate
value, and use the rotary cylinder in the highlighted field
to set the values for each of the two switch positions
separately.
Pressing CLEAR in the highlighted field resets an
altered value to 100%.
Caution:
The Dual Rate value should always be at least 20% of
total control travel, otherwise you could lose all control of
that function.
Examples of different Dual Rate values:
Stick deflection
Dual Rate = 20%
Dual Rate = 50%
Dual Rate = 100%
Servo travel
The Dual Rate / Expo function provides a means of
switching to reduced control travels, and of influencing
the travel characteristics, for aileron, elevator and rudder
(control functions 2 … 4). This can be carried out in flight
by means of switches.
Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control
travel adjustment in the »contr set.« menu, i. e. it affects
the corresponding stick function, regardless of whether
that function controls a single servo or multiple servos
via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.
For each switch position the servo travels can be set to
any value within the range 0 to 125% of full travel.
Expo works in a different way. If you set a value greater
than 0%, exponential provides fine control of the model
around the centre position of the primary control functions (aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting
full travel at the end-points of stick movement. If you set
a value lower than 0%, travel is increased around the
neutral position, and reduces towards the extremes of
travel. The degree of “progression” can therefore be set
to any value within the range -100% to +100%, where
0% equates to normal, linear control characteristics.
Another application for exponential is to improve the
linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the standard
nowadays. With a rotary servo the movement of the
control surface is inevitably non-linear, as the linear
movement of the output disc or lever diminishes progressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the
rate of travel of the control surface declines steadily
towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of
the linkage point on the output disc or lever. You can
compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value
greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of
the output device increases disproportionately as stick
travel increases.
Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the
corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that
function controls a single servo or multiple servos via
any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.
The Dual Rate and Expo functions can be switched
together if you assign a switch to the function. The result
of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can be controlled
simultaneously using a single switch, and this can be
advantageous – especially with high-speed models.
Servo travel
0%
0%
0%
EXPO
SEL
Servo travel
aile 100%
elev 100%
rudd 100%
DUAL
SEL
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Examples of different Expo values:
Expo = –100%
Expo = +50%
88%
aile
elev
77%
rudd 100%
DUAL
SEL
0%
0%
0%
EXPO
SEL
2
2
and after moving switch “2” to the “forward” position:
aile 111% + 11%
elev 111% + 22%
rudd 100% + 0%
DUAL EXPO
SEL
SEL
2
2
Servo travel
Servo travel
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
e. g. “switch back”:
For example, the system enables you to fly with a linear
curve characteristic in the one switch position, and to
pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch position.
To change the Expo value, first select the SEL field,
then use the rotary cylinder in the highlighted field to set
separate values for each of the two switch positions:
Pressing CLEAR in the highlighted field resets an
altered value to 100%.
Expo = +100%
Servo travel
2
2
Expo = –100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 125%
Servo travel
aile 100% + 11%
elev 100% + 22%
rudd 100% + 0%
DUAL EXPO
SEL
SEL
Combined Dual Rate and Expo
If you enter values for both Dual Rates and Expo, the
two functions are superimposed as follows:
Servo travel
Exponential function
If you wish to switch between two settings, select the
field and assign a switch as described on page 33.
The assigned switch appears in the screen together with
a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operation when you move the switch.
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each
case.
Program description: Dual Rate / Expo – fixed-wing model
67
Dual Rate / Expo
Switchable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor
The Dual Rate / Expo function provides a means of
switching to reduced control travels, and influencing the
travel characteristics, for the roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor
servos (control functions 2 … 4). This can be carried out
in flight by means of a switch.
A separate curve for control function 1 (motor / collective
pitch) can be set individually for throttle, collective pitch
and tail rotor in the »heli mixer« menu. These curves
feature up to five separately programmable points; see
the section starting on page 78 and also page 118.
Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control
travel adjustment in the »contr set.« menu, i. e. it affects
the corresponding stick function, regardless of whether
that function controls a single servo or multiple servos
via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.
For each switch position the servo travels can be set to
any value within the range 0 to 125% of full travel.
Expo works in a different way. If you set a value greater
than 0%, exponential provides fine control of the model
around the centre position of the primary control functions (roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor), without forfeiting full
travel at the end-points of stick movement. If you set
a value lower than 0%, travel is increased around the
neutral position, and diminishes towards the extremes of
travel. The degree of “progression” can be set within the
range -100% to +100%, where 0% equates to normal,
linear control characteristics.
Another application for exponential is to improve the
68
linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the standard
nowadays. With a rotary servo the movement of the
control surface is inevitably non-linear, as the linear
movement of the output disc or lever diminishes progressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the
rate of travel of the control surface declines steadily
towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of
the linkage point on the output disc or lever. You can
compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value
greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of
the output device increases disproportionately as stick
travel increases.
Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the
corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that
function controls a single servo or multiple servos via
any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.
The Dual Rate and Expo functions can also be switched
together if you assign a switch to the function. The result
of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can be controlled
simultaneously using a single switch, and this can be
advantageous – especially with high-speed models.
The basic set-up procedure
1. Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to select the desired line: “aile”, “elev” or “rudd”.
2. Use the rotary cylinder to select SEL under the
DUAL or EXPO column, so that you can make adjustments at that point.
3. Press the rotary cylinder. The appropriate input field
is now highlighted.
4. Set the desired value using the rotary cylinder.
5. Press the rotary cylinder to conclude the input process and return to the function field.
Program description: Dual Rate / Expo – model helicopter
Dual Rate function
If you wish to switch between two possible D/R settings,
select the
symbol and assign a physical switch as
described in the section “Assigning switches and control
switches” on page 33.
roll
nick
push
itail
nto
0%
100%
100%
desired 0%
switch
100%
p
o s i t i o n 0%
ON
DUAL EXPO
SEL
SEL
Select the left-hand SEL field to change the Dual Rate
value, and use the rotary cylinder in the highlighted field
to set the values for each of the two switch positions
separately.
Pressing CLEAR in the highlighted field resets an
altered value to 100%.
Caution:
The Dual Rate value should always be at least 20% of
total control travel, otherwise you could lose all control of
that function.
Examples of different Dual Rate values:
Stick deflection
Dual Rate = 20%
Dual Rate = 50%
Dual Rate = 100%
Servo travel
0%
0%
0%
EXPO
SEL
Servo travel
100%
100%
100%
DUAL
SEL
Servo travel
roll
nick
tail
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
2
2
Stick deflection
Examples of different Expo values:
Expo = –100%
Expo = +50%
roll
nick
tail
88%
77%
100%
DUAL
SEL
0%
0%
0%
EXPO
SEL
2
2
and after moving switch “2” to the “forward” position:
roll
nick
tail
111% + 11%
111% + 22%
100% + 0%
DUAL EXPO
SEL
SEL
2
2
Servo travel
Servo travel
Servo travel
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
e. g. “switch back”:
For example, the system enables you to fly with a linear
curve characteristic in the one switch position, and to
pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch position.
To change the Expo value, first select the SEL field,
then use the rotary cylinder in the highlighted field to set
separate values for each of the two switch positions:
Pressing CLEAR in the highlighted field resets an
altered value to 100%.
Expo = +100%
Servo travel
100% + 11%
100% + 22%
100% + 0%
DUAL EXPO
SEL
SEL
Expo = –100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 50%
Expo = +100%, DR = 125%
Servo travel
roll
nick
tail
Combined Dual Rate and Expo
If you enter values for both Dual Rates and Expo, the
two functions are superimposed as follows:
Servo travel
Exponential function
If you wish to switch between two settings, select the
field and assign a switch as described on page 33.
The assigned switch appears in the screen together with
a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operation when you move the switch.
Stick deflection
Stick deflection
In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each
case.
Program description: Dual Rate / Expo – model helicopter
69
Phase trim
Flight phase-specific trims for flaps, ailerons and elevator
If you have not assigned a switch to “Phase 2” and /
or “Phase 3” in the »base sett.« menu, i. e. you have
not assigned names and switches to these alternative
phases, you automatically remain in flight phase 1 –
“normal”.
The number and name of this flight phase are permanently assigned, and cannot be altered. For this reason
the “normal” phase is not stated as Phase 1 in the
»base sett.« menu; it is simply hidden.
clock
phase 2
phase 3
train. / stu.
C2
0:00
Start
takeoff
Speed
speed
1QR
SEL
If you select the »phase trim« menu with this basic arrangement, i. e. without setting up flight phases, you will
find just the “normal” line on the screen, whose pre-set
values of 0% are not usually altered.
P H A S E T R I M
0%
0%
0%
¿normal
FLAP AILE ELEV
Note:
In this menu you will have at least one control function
(ELEV), and a maximum of three functions (ELEV, AILE
and FLAP), available for phase-specific trim settings, depending on the settings you have entered in the “Aileron
/ flap” line of the »base sett.« menu (see page 47).
when thermalling, or faster when flying speed tasks, but
WITHOUT having to change the basic settings each
time, then you need to use alternative flight phases. This
is done by activating “Phase 2” and, if necessary, “Phase
3” in the »base sett.« menu.
This is accomplished by moving to the »base sett.«
menu and assigning a relevant name and switch to
“Phase 2” and (if required) “Phase 3”. If you decide
to use the three-position switch SW 6/7 as the phase
switch, then it is advisable to assign it to “Phase 2” and
“Phase 3” at the extremes, with “normal” at the centre
position.
Note:
At the centre position of SW 6/7 the switch symbols on
the screen should look as in the picture at top right.
The default name for “Phase 2” is “takeoff”, while that
for “Phase 3” is “speed”. However, you can assign your
own choice of names at any time by selecting SEL and
pressing the rotary cylinder. The names available are as
follows:
• takeoff
• thermal
• dist(ance)
• speed
• aerobat(ic)
• landing
• ait-tow
• test
If you wish to enter values other than “0”, e. g. to have
more lift at launch, or to be able to fly more slowly
70
Program description: phase trim – fixed-wing model
clock
phase 2
phase 3
train. / stu.
C2
0:00
7
takeoff
6
speed
1QR
SEL
Once assigned, these names will appear in the transmitter’s basic display, and in the »phase trim« menu.
Setting up flight phase trims
In the »phase trim« menu you can adjust the trims for
the previously selected flight phases.
The first step is to switch to the phase which you wish
to adjust (the “Ô at far left indicates the currently active
phase).
P H A S E
T R I M
0%
0%
0%
takeoff + 0% + 0% + 0%
speed – 0% – 0% – 0%
FLAP AILE ELEV
¿normal
Select the desired control function using the rotary
cylinder, then press it before turning it again to set the
required trim values.
You can activate the different phases by operating the
assigned phase select switch or switches. Note that
the servos do not change from one setting to another
abruptly; they move smoothly with a transition time of
around one second.
Values can be set within the range -99% to +99%, in a
similar way to transmitter control centre offset, or the
offset setting of other radio control systems. However,
typical values are normally in single figures or low
double figures.
P H A S E T R I M
normal
0%
0%
0%
¿ takeoff + 10% + 5% + 2%
speed – 7% – 5% – 1%
FLAP AILE ELEV
Note:
When setting up »phase trim«, only the column “ELEV”,
the columns “AILE” and “ELEV”, or – as shown above –
“FLAP”, “AILE” and “ELEV” will be available for “phase
trimming”; this depends on the information you have entered in the “Aileron / flap” line of the »base sett.« menu.
Program description: phase trim – fixed-wing model
71
What is a mixer?
Fixed-wing mixers
The basic function
In many models it is often desirable to use a mixer to
couple various control systems, e. g. to link the ailerons
and rudder, or to inter-connect a pair of servos where
two control surfaces are actuated by separate servos. In
all these cases the signal which flows directly from the
“output” of a transmitter stick to the associated servo
is “bled off” at a particular point - this effect can also
“concealed” in transmitter control options such as »D/R
expo« or »contr set.« – and the derived signal is then
processed in such a way that it affects the “input” of another control channel, and therefore eventually another
receiver output.
3
4,8 V
3
C 577
Control channel
(receiver output)
Servo
Function
input
Best.-Nr. 4101
Example:
Controlling two elevator servos using the elevator stick:
4,8 V
C 577
8
Servo
Mixer
Best.-Nr. 4101
Servo 1
Transmitter
control
Servo 2
diff aile.
diff. flaps
rudd
ail
flaps
ail
brak
elev
flap
brak
brak
aile
flap
elev
aile
elev
elev
flap
aile
flap
diff–red
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
SEL
(The display varies according to the information you
have entered in the “Motor on Ch 1” and “aile / flap” lines
in the »base sett.« menu. The selection above equates
to the setting “no (motor)” and “2ail 2fl”.)
The mx-16iFS transmitter’s program contains a series
of pre-programmed coupling functions, and all you have
to do is set the mixer ratios and (optionally) assign a
switch. The number of pre-programmed mixer functions
in the mixer list will vary according to the pre-set “model
type” (tail type, number of wing servos, with or without
motor – see the section starting on page 46). For example, if your model is not fitted with camber-changing
flaps, and you have not entered any flap servos in the
»base sett.« menu, the software automatically suppresses all the flap mixers, as are the “Brake ¼ N.N.*”
mixers if you enter “Idle forward” or “Idle back” in the
“Motor on Ch 1” line. This makes the menus clearer and
easier to understand, and also avoids potential programming errors.
The mx-16iFS transmitter software contains a large
number of pre-programmed coupling functions as
standard, designed to mix together two (or more) control
channels. The mixer required in this example is supplied “ready-made” in the software, and just has to be
activated in the “tail” line of the »base sett.« menu in the
form of “2 elev sv”.
The software also includes three freely programmable
linear mixers in the fixed-wing and helicopter programs,
all of which can be used in each model memory.
For more information please refer to the general notes
on »free mixer« in the section of this manual starting on
page 88.
* N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
72 Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model
Notes:
• There are various alternative methods of positioning
the camber-changing flaps; these include:
a) Settling on just one position per flight phase,
simply by setting appropriate trim values in the
»phase trim« menu;
b) Controlling the flaps manually using any transmitter control assigned to “Input 6” (in the »contr set.« menu – see page 58), after setting the basic flap positions in the »phase trim« menu, as
described earlier. Ideally the transmitter control
would be one of the INC / DEC controls (CTRL 5
or 6), as their positions are stored separately for
each flight phase.
The selected transmitter control directly operates
the two flap servos connected to receiver outputs
6 and 7, assuming that you have specified flaps in
the “Aile / flap” line of the »base sett.« menu. The
same control determines the flap setting of the ailerons via the percentage value entered in the
“flap ¼ aile” mixer line.
For finer control of the flap positions, we recommend that you reduce their travel to about 25% in
the »contr set.« menu.
c) It is also possible to leave the default setting of
“0%” in the appropriate line “flap ¼ aile” of the
»wing mixer« menu, and to assign the same
transmitter control to both input 6 and input 5 in
the »contr set.« menu. The magnitude of the effect on the two pairs of wing flaps can then be adjusted using the servo travel adjustment facility.
• If a transmitter control is assigned to input “7”, it will
be de-coupled by the software if two camber-changing flaps are defined; this is intentional, as it elimi-
nates the danger of errors when a flap command is
given.
The basic programming procedure
1. Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to select the desired mixer.
The bottom line of the screen will now display SEL
symbol.
on its own, or with the
2. Use the rotary cylinder to select one of these two
fields.
3. Press the rotary cylinder: the appropriate input field
is now highlighted.
4. Set the desired value using the rotary cylinder, and
assign a switch if required.
Negative and positive parameter values are possible;
this may be necessary to obtain the correct direction
of servo rotation (control surface deflection).
Pressing CLEAR in the inverse field resets an altered
value to the default value.
5. Press the rotary cylinder to conclude the input process.
Mixer neutral point (offset)
The neutral point of the mixers
Aileron ¼ N.N.*
Elevator ¼ N.N.*
Flap
¼ N.N.*
is by default the zero point of the transmitter control,
i. e. that is the point at which they have no effect. At the
end-point of the transmitter control the full mixer value is
applied.
The default neutral point (“offset”) of the mixers
Airbrake ¼ N.N.*
*
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
at which the airbrakes are always retracted, is the
forward position of the Ch 1 stick (throttle / airbrakes) if
you select “no” in the “Motor at Ch 1” line of the »base
sett.« menu, and is the back position of the Ch 1 stick if
you select “no/inv”.
0% (normal)
diff aile.
(differential aileron travel)
50% (differential)
Aileron differential compensates for an unwanted sideeffect which occurs when ailerons are deflected: the
problem known as “adverse yaw”. When ailerons are
100% (split)
deflected, the drag generated by the down-going aileron
is greater than that produced by the up-going aileron.
The differential drag causes a yawing motion around the
It is easily possible to vary the degree of differential
vertical axis in the opposite direction to the desired turn.
without affecting the travel of the up-going aileron. At
This effect is much more pronounced in model gliders
one extreme it is possible to suppress the down-aileron
with high aspect ratio wings than in power models with
deflection completely, i. e. only the up-going aileron
their much shorter moment arms, and usually has to be
moves at all, and this arrangement is sometimes called
countered by giving a simultaneous rudder deflection in
the “split” setting. Split ailerons not only tend to suppress
the opposite direction to the yaw. However, this in turns
adverse yaw, but can even generate positive yaw, which
causes additional drag and reduces the aircraft’s efmeans that the model yaws in the direction of the turn
ficiency even further.
when an aileron command is given. In the case of large
Aileron differential reduces the angular travel of the
model gliders, smooth turns can then be flown using
down-going aileron relative to the up-going aileron, and
ailerons alone, which with most models of this type is
this reduces the drag and therefore the adverse yaw.
usually by no means the case.
However, electronic differential can only be applied
The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it posif each aileron is actuated by its own servo, usually
sible to set the correct direction of differential regardless
mounted in the wings themselves. The shorter pushrods
of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. “0%”
also result in virtually slop-free aileron linkages with
corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. no differential,
reliable centring.
while “-100%” or “+100%” represents the “split” function.
Mechanical solutions are also possible, but they usually
For aerobatic flying it is necessary to set low absolute
have to be “designed in” when the model is built, and the differential values, to ensure that the model rotates
degree of differential cannot be altered subsequently.
exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron
In any case significant mechanical differential tends to
command is given. Moderate values around -50% or
cause additional slop in the control system. Electronic
+50% are typical for making thermal turns easier to fly.
differential offers the following important advantages:
The split setting (-100%, +100%) is popular with slope
Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model 73
flyers, when ailerons alone are often used for turning the
model.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
ail ¼ rudd
(Aileron ¼ rudder)
Note:
Although it is possible to enter negative values in order
to reverse the direction of servo rotation, this is not usually necessary if the correct channels are used.
diff. flaps
(Camber-changing flap differential)
The aileron / flap mixer (see below) is designed to
superimpose an aileron function on the flaps. Flap
differential works like aileron differential, and produces
a reduced flap movement in the down-direction when
these surfaces are used as supplementary ailerons.
The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it
possible to set the correct direction of differential regardless of the direction of rotation of the servo. “0%”
corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. the servo travel is
the same up and down. A setting of “-100%” or “+100%”
means that the down-travel of the flaps is reduced to
zero when an aileron command is given (“split” setting).
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
Note:
Negative values are not usually necessary if the correct
channels are used.
In this case the rudder automatically “follows” when an
aileron command is given, and the mixer ratio (degree
of following) can be set by the user. Coupled aileron
/ rudder (sometimes abbreviated to CAR; also known
as “combi-switch”) is especially useful for suppressing
adverse yaw in conjunction with aileron differential, and
this combination usually makes smooth turns very easy
to fly. Naturally, the rudder can still be controlled separately by means of its dedicated stick. If an (optional)
switch (SW 1 … 4) is assigned to this function, the mixer
can be turned on and off in flight, so that you can control
the ailerons and rudder separately if and when you so
desire.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
Often a value around 50% fits.
ail ¼ flaps
(Aileron ¼ flap)
This mixer feeds a variable amount of the aileron signal
74
Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model
into the flap channel. When an aileron command is
given, the flaps “follow” the ailerons, although usually
through a smaller angle, i. e. the mixer ratio is generally less than 100%. The adjustment range of -150%
to +150% allows the user to set up the flap direction to
match that of the ailerons.
The flaps should not deflect more than about 50% of the
(mechanical) travel of the ailerons.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
Note:
If your model is equipped with only one flap servo, you
should still select “2fl” in the “aile / flap” line of the »base
sett.« menu (see page 47) but leave this “aile ¼ flap”
mixer at 0%. In contrast, all the other wing mixers can be
used in the usual way.
brak ¼ elev
(Airbrake ¼ elevator)
Extending any form of airbrakes usually generates an
unwanted change in pitch trim (nose up or nose down);
this is especially marked when a butterfly (crow) braking
system is deployed (see next page).
This mixer feeds a corrective signal to the elevator to
compensate for this unwanted moment. The adjustment
range is -150% to +150%.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
“Usual” values are generally in single to low double
figures. It is essential to check and adjust this setting at
a safe height.
brak ¼ flap
(Airbrake ¼ flap)
When you operate the brake function (Ch 1 stick), both
flap servos move together for the landing approach; the
mixer ratio can be set to any value in the range -150% to
+150%. Down-flap is usually selected.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
At this point you select the value which causes the flaps
to deflect down as far as possible when the airbrake
function is deployed. However, please ensure that none
of the servos concerned strikes its mechanical endstops (servos stalled).
brak ¼ aile
to +150%.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
It can also be useful to deflect both ailerons up slightly
when the airbrakes are extended.
Combination of the “brak ¼ N.N.*” mixers:
“Crow” or “Butterfly” setting
If you have set up all three airbrake mixers for your
model, it is then possible to program a special configuration known as the “crow” or “butterfly” arrangement for
glide path control. In the butterfly setting both ailerons
are deflected up by a moderate amount, and both flaps
down by the maximum possible amount. The third mixer
provides elevator trim to counteract any unwanted pitch
trim change and maintain the model’s airspeed at a
safe level. This is necessary to avoid the danger of the
model slowing up excessively; if the landing approach is
started too soon, and has to be extended by retracting
the airbrakes again, the model could then stall abruptly.
Note:
If your model features full-span (strip) ailerons which
also double as camber-changing flaps, the two mixers “Brake ¼ aileron” and “Brake ¼ elevator” can be
combined for glide path control. In this case up-flap is
applied, but the flaps can still be controlled as ailerons.
Elevator pitch trim compensation is generally required.
If you have programmed aileron differential, the response of the ailerons will inevitably be adversely
affected by the extreme “up” deflection of the ailerons
in the butterfly setting, because the differential travel
reduces or entirely suppresses the down-aileron deflection. However, the “up” travel of the ailerons is also
greatly restricted because they are already at or close to
their “up” end-point. The remedy here is to apply “differential reduction”, which is explained in its own section
later.
elev ¼ flap
(Elevator ¼ flap)
(Airbrake ¼ Aileron)
When you operate the brake function, both aileron
servos move together for the landing approach; the
mixer ratio can be set to any value in the range -150%
This inter-action between the flaps, ailerons and elevator
is used to control the glide angle on the landing approach. Optionally the butterfly setting can also be used
without the airbrakes or spoilers; nowadays this is very
commonly used for sports and competition aircraft.
*
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
The flaps can be used to enhance the effect of the elevator in tight turns and aerobatics, and this mixer feeds
part of the elevator signal to the flap servos. The mixer
direction must be set so that the flaps move down when
up-elevator is applied, and vice versa.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
For this mixer the “usual” settings are in the low two-digit
range.
Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model 75
elev ¼ aile
(Elevator ¼ aileron)
This mixer allows the ailerons to reinforce the elevator
response in the same way as the previous mixer.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
For this mixer the “usual” settings are again in the low
two-digit range.
flap ¼ elev
(Flap ¼ elevator)
flap ¼ aile
(Flap ¼ aileron)
This mixer causes a variable proportion of the flap signal
to be mixed in with the aileron channels 2 and 5 so that
the ailerons follow the movement of the flaps, albeit
normally with a smaller deflection. The net result is more
even lift distribution over the full wingspan.
Pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.
Note:
If you assign a transmitter control to inputs 5 and 6 in
the »contr set.« menu for adjusting the flap positions,
then you should leave the value for this mixer at 0%. See
the notes on page 72 in this regard.
When the camber-changing flaps are lowered, either
using »phase trim« or by means of a transmitter control
assigned to input “6”, a pitch trim change (up or down)
may occur. Alternatively it may be desirable for slight
down-elevator to be applied automatically when the
flaps are raised by a small amount, in order to increase
the model’s basic airspeed. This mixer can be used to
achieve both purposes.
When the flaps are deployed, this mixer causes the
elevator setting to be corrected automatically according
to the flap deflection.
76
diff-red
(Differential reduction)
The problem of reduced aileron response in the butterfly configuration has been mentioned earlier: if aileron
differential is employed, the aileron response on the
landing approach may be adversely affected through
the extreme “up” deflection of the ailerons, permitting
virtually no further up-movement; on the other hand
the “down” travel has already been reduced by the
programmed differential setting. The overall result is
significantly reduced aileron response compared with
the normal setting of the control surfaces.
In this case you really should use “differential reduction” if at all possible. This reduces the degree of aileron
Program description: wing mixers – fixed-wing model
differential when you invoke the butterfly setting using
the airbrake stick. Differential is reduced progressively,
or even eliminated altogether, as the airbrake stick is
moved towards its end-point.
A value of 0% at this point means that the full programmed aileron differential is retained. A value of 100%
means that the aileron differential is completely eliminated at the maximum butterfly setting, i. e. when the
airbrakes and other glide path control surfaces are fully
extended. If you set a value above 100%, the aileron
differential is eliminated even before full travel of the
airbrake stick is reached.
For your notes
77
Helicopter mixers
Flight phase-specific mixers for collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor
In the »base sett.« menu a method of switching flight
phases can be activated by assigning the appropriate
switches to “Phase 2” and “Auto-rotation”. You can then
switch between the phases “normal” and a second
phase – to which you assign a more appropriate name
yourself, if necessary – using one of the switches SW 1
… 4. The third phase – Auto-rotation – has precedence
over the other two phases. Please note that switching
to auto-rotation always has priority over the other
two phases.
If you have not yet assigned switches for the flight
phases, you should do so now. Use the rotary cylinder
to move to the switch symbol at bottom right, then press
the rotary cylinder briefly.
pitch min
clock
phase 2
autorotat.
front
10:01
C3
3
hover
1
SEL
Phase 1 always bears the designation “normal”. Both
the number and name of this phase are permanently
assigned, and cannot be altered. For this reason the
“normal” phase is not stated as Phase 1 in the »base
sett.« menu; it is simply concealed.
“Phase 2” is assigned the default name “hover”, but you
can change this if you prefer. Hold the rotary cylinder
pressed in to select one of the following names:
• hover
• aerobat(ic)
• aero 3D
• speed
• test
78
Description of the helicopter mixers
Five-point curves are available for setting up the control
characteristics of “collective pitch”, “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” and
“Ch 1 ¼ tail rotor”. Using these curves it is possible to
program non-linear mixer ratios along the travel of the
transmitter stick for these mixers. Move to the display
page for setting 5-point curves by pressing the ENTER
button or the rotary cylinder (see below).
In contrast, the mixers “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” and “Ch 1 ¼
tail rotor” are not required for the “Auto-rotation” flight
phase (described in the section starting on page 86);
instead they are automatically switched to a (variable)
pre-defined value.
A value must be entered in the “Gyro” and “Input 8”
lines: press the rotary cylinder, then enter a value in the
highlighted field using the rotary cylinder – in a similar
fashion to changing the transmitter centre position or the
offset position with other radio control systems. Pressing
the CLEAR button resets this parameter value to 0%.
All these options are required for the basic process of
setting up a model helicopter.
The name of the currently selected flight phase is
displayed in the »heli mixer« menu as well as in the
transmitter’s basic display; this is designed to ensure
that any changes you make actually apply to the appropriate flight phase. Note that the servos do not change
from one setting to another abruptly; they move smoothly with a transition time of around one second. This does
not apply to auto-rotation: when you switch INTO autorotation, the change takes place immediately.
If you operate the switch selected for a particular flight
phase, the associated flight phase is superimposed at
the bottom edge of the screen, e. g. “normal”:
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
ptch
ch1
thro
tail
ch1
gyro
inp8
normal
0%
0%
SEL
Now you can program the settings for this flight phase.
ptch
(Pitch curve (Ch1 ¼ collective pitch))
Select the “ptch” line and press ENTER or the rotary
cylinder:
ptch
input
output
point 3
normal
0%
0%
0%
The control curve can be based on a maximum of
five nodes, known as “reference points”, which can be
placed along the length of the control travel; separate
curves can be programmed for each flight phase.
However, in most cases it is sufficient to use a smaller
number of reference points when defining the collective
pitch curve. As a basic rule we recommend that you
start with the three default reference points offered by
the software. These three points, i. e. the two end-points
“Point 1” (collective pitch minimum), “Point 5” (collective
pitch maximum) and “Point 3”, exactly in the centre of
the travel, initially describe a linear characteristic for the
collective pitch curve; this is represented in the picture
above.
ptch
0%
input
+ 75%
output
point 3 + 75%
normal
In this example we have moved reference point “3” to
+75%.
However, points “2” and “4” can optionally be activated,
even though they are disabled by default:
characteristics by no means represent real collective
pitch curves!
ptch
+ 0%
input
+ 50%
output
point 3 + 50%
normal
ptch
50%
input
+ 12%
output
point 2 deact
normal
Typical collective pitch curves for different flight phases:
+100%
+100%
+100%
Output
Output
ptch
+ 50%
input
+ 88%
output
point 4 +deact
normal
Output
The programming procedure in detail
Start by switching to the desired flight phase, e. g.
“normal”.
The throttle / collective pitch stick can now be used to
move the vertical line in the graph between the two
end-points “Point 1” and “Point 5”; at the same time the
momentary position of the stick is displayed in numeric
form in the “Input” line (-100% to +100%).
The point where the vertical line crosses the curve is
termed the “Output”, and this point can be varied within
the range -125% and +125% at a maximum of five reference points. This control signal, modified in this way,
affects the collective pitch servos only. In the picture on
the left the stick is exactly at the 0% position at “Point
3”, and also generates an output signal of 0% due to the
linear nature of the graph.
By default only points “1” (collective pitch minimum at
-100%), “3” (hover point at 0%) and “5” (collective pitch
maximum at +100% travel) are active.
To set a point you use the associated stick to move the
vertical line to the point you wish to change. The number
and current curve value of this point are displayed in the
bottom line in the left-hand half of the screen. The rotary
cylinder can now be used to change the current curve
value in the highlighted field to any value within the
range -125% to +125%, without affecting the adjacent
points.
-100%
-100%
-100%
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
Control travel
Control travel
Control travel
Hover
Aerobatics
3D
5
This is accomplished using the stick to move the vertical
line to the appropriate area. As soon as the message
“inactive” appears in the highlighted value field, you
can activate the associated point by turning the rotary
cylinder; it can then be adjusted in the same manner as
the other points …
ptch
+ 50%
input
+ 50%
output
point 4 + 50%
normal
… or reset to “inactive” by pressing the CLEAR button.
Points “1” and “5”, however, CANNOT BE DISABLED.
Note:
The following illustration, and all the other pictures on
this page, show a control curve which we prepared for
illustration purposes only. Please note that the curve
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
79
Helicopter with glow or electric motor with
STANDARD SPEED CONTROLLER
This display refers only to the control curve of the throttle
servo or speed controller.
The method of setting up a throttle curve for a model
helicopter fitted with a speed governor or regulator is
discussed later.
The throttle curve can be defined using up to five points,
in a similar way to the collective pitch curve (see previous
page).
• In all cases the control curve must be set up in such
a way that the throttle is fully open, or the speed
controller of an electric helicopter is at full power, at
the end-point of the throttle / collective pitch stick,
(exception: auto-rotation – see page 86).
• The hover point is normally located at the centre of
the stick travel, and the throttle setting should be
adjusted relative to the collective pitch curve in such
a way that the correct system rotational speed is
obtained at this point.
• At the minimum position of the throttle / collective
pitch stick the throttle curve should initially be set up
so that the (glow) motor runs at a distinctly higher
speed compared to the idle setting, with the clutch
reliably engaged.
In all flight phases the motor (glow or electric) is
80
0:00
STARLET
throttleStop
too Flug
0:00
#02
high
!
«normal
»
9.6V
normal
5:36h
K78 IFS
The following three diagrams show typical 3-point throttle
curves for different flight phases, such as hover, aerobatics and 3-D flying.
Typical throttle curves for different flight phases:
+100%
+100%
+100%
Output
ch1
thro
0%
input
0%
output
0%
point 3
normal
started and stopped using the throttle limiter (see
below).
If you are used to a different radio control system which
uses two separate flight phases for this – “with idle-up”
and “without idle-up” – please note that the throttle limiter
renders this complication superfluous, as the increased
system rotational speed below the hover point in the mx16iFS program is more flexible, and can be fine-tuned
more accurately, than the “idle-up” system used with
earlier mc radio control systems.
Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before you start
the glow motor, i. e. the throttle can only be adjusted
within its idle range using the idle trim. Be sure to read
the safety notes on page 85 which refer to this. If the idle
is set too high when you switch the transmitter on, you
will see and hear a clear warning!
Output
(Throttle curve)
Output
ch1 ¼ thro
-100%
-100%
-100%
1
2
3
4
Control travel
Hover
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
5
1
2
3
4
Control travel
Aerobatics
5
1
2
3
4
Control travel
3D
5
Notes on using the “Throttle limit” function:
• We strongly recommend that you make use of the
throttle limit function (»contr set.« menu, page 62).
When you use this function the throttle servo is completely disconnected from the throttle / collective pitch
stick when the proportional throttle limit control is at
its left-hand end-point; the motor runs at idle and only
responds to the Ch 1 trim. This feature enables you
to start the motor from within any flight phase.
• Once the motor is running, turn the throttle limiter
slowly to the opposite end-point, so that full control
of the throttle servo is returned to the throttle / collective pitch stick. It is important that the throttle limiter should not restrict the throttle servo at its top endpoint; you can avoid this by setting the control travel
to +125% in the “lim” line of the »contr set.« menu.
• Since electric motors by their nature require no idle
setting, the only important point when setting up an
electric-powered model helicopter is that the adjustment range of the throttle limiter should be set significantly higher and lower than the adjustment range
of the speed controller, which is usually from -100%
to +100%. It may therefore be necessary to set the
“Travel” value of the throttle limiter to an appropriate
point in the “Lim” line of the »contr set.« menu. However, the throttle curve itself has to be fine-tuned with
the helicopter in flight, just like a glow-powered machine.
• Releasing the full throttle range, and imposing the
throttle limiter again, trips the switching threshold of
the control switch “C3” (i. e. in either direction); this
switch can be used for automatically starting and
stopping the stopwatch to record the flight time, or
some similar purpose; see page 33.
When you select auto-rotation, the mixer automatically switches the value to a variable pre-set value;
see the section starting on page 86.
Helicopter with speed GOVERNOR (REGULATOR)
In contrast to speed controllers, which simply adjust
power output in the same way as a carburettor, speed
governors maintain a constant rotational speed in the
system which they regulate; they accomplish this by
adjusting the power output as required. In the case of a
glow-powered helicopter the governor automatically controls the throttle servo; in an electric-powered machine
the governor does the same with the speed controller.
For this reason speed governors do not require a classic
throttle curve; they just need a pre-set rotational speed.
Once this is set, the system rotational speed does not
alter unless the system requires more power from the
motor than is available.
In most cases a speed governor is connected to receiver
output 8; see receiver socket sequence on page 41. If
this socket is already in use, then the throttle limiter function is not used, since this only affects output 6 – which is
now not occupied – via the “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” mixer.
However, if you wish to be able to exploit the convenience and safety features of the throttle limiter, the speed
governor should be connected to receiver output 6 – in
contrast to the usual socket sequence – and the throttle
curve adjusted so that it can simply assume the role of
the “usual” transmitter control.
In this case the “throttle curve” only determines the
nominal rotational speed of the speed controller, and this
nominal value is required to remain constant over the full
range of collective pitch; for this reason a horizontal line
should be set in the “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” mixer, i. e. every
(collective pitch) input value results in the same (“throt-
tle”) output value. The “height” of the line in the graph
determines the nominal system rotational speed.
Initially, then, reference point “3” should be erased, and
reference points “1” (input = -100%) and “5” (input =
+100%) set to the same value; for example:
ch1
thro
–100%
input
+ 30%
output
point 1 + 30%
normal
The value to be set varies according to the speed governor you are using, and also to the desired nominal
rotational speed; you may wish to vary it, of course, in the
various flight phases.
When you select auto-rotation, the mixer automatically switches the value to a variable pre-set value;
see the section starting on page 86.
ch1 ¼ tail
(static torque compensation)
tail
ch1
0%
input
0%
output
0%
point 3
normal
The default setting is a torque compensation curve with a
uniform linear mixer input of 0%, as is required for a gyro
sensor operating in “heading lock mode”; see illustration
above.
Important note:
It is absolutely essential to read and observe the setup instructions supplied with your gyro before entering any settings at this point, as a mistake here could
render your helicopter completely uncontrollable.
If you use your gyro sensor in “normal” operating mode,
or if the gyro only offers “normal mode”, then you should
set up the mixer as follows:
The tail rotor control curve can be defined using up to
five points, in a similar way to the collective pitch curve
(see previous page). You can therefore modify the mixer
at any time when required, and enter symmetrical or
asymmetrical mixer inputs both above and below the
hover point. However, please ensure at the outset that
you have entered the correct direction of main rotor rotation in the »base sett.« menu.
tail
ch1
0%
input
0%
output
0%
point 3
normal
Starting from -30% at Point 1 and +30% at Point 5, this
mixer should be set up in such a way that the helicopter
does not rotate around the vertical (yaw) axis (i. e. does
not deviate from the hover heading) during a long vertical
climb or descent, due to the change in torque of the main
rotor. At the hover the yaw trim should be set using the
(digital) tail rotor trim lever only.
For a reliable torque compensation setting it is essential
that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been set
up correctly, i. e. that main rotor speed remains constant
over the full range of collective pitch.
When you select auto-rotation, this mixer is automatically switched off.
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
81
gyro
(adjusting gyro gain)
Most modern gyro systems feature proportional, infinitely variable adjustment of gyro gain as well as a means
of selecting either of two different methods of working
from the transmitter.
If the gyro you wish to use features at least one of these
options, then it offers you the possibility of pre-setting
both “normal” gyro effect and – if available – “heading
lock mode”, and also of flying normal, slow circuits with
maximum gyro stabilisation, but reducing the gyro effect
for high-speed circuits and aerobatics. This is generally
similar to the transmitter control centre adjustment or
offset adjustment provided by other radio control systems.
We recommend that you set up switchable flight phases
for this, and set different gain settings for each phase in
the “gyro” line; values between -125% and +125% are
possible.
full travel (away from centre), the gyro gain increases
accordingly …
• … and diminishes again if you press it in the direction
of the opposite end-point.
Important note:
It is absolutely essential to read and observe the
set-up instructions supplied with your gyro before
entering any settings at this point, as a mistake here
could render your helicopter completely uncontrollable.
Adjusting the gyro sensor
If you wish to set up a gyro to achieve maximum possible stabilisation of the helicopter around the vertical
axis, please note the following points:
• The mechanical control system should be as freemoving and accurate (slop-free) as possible.
• There should be no “spring” or “give” in the tail rotor
linkage.
ptch
•
You must use a powerful and – above all – fast servo
ch1
thro
for the tail rotor.
ch1
tail
0%
gyro
When the gyro sensor detects a deviation in yaw, the
faster it adjusts the thrust of the tail rotor, the further the
normal
SEL
gyro gain adjuster can be advanced without the tail of
Based on the offset values determined for each flight
the model starting to oscillate, and the better the maphase, gyro gain can be varied proportionally by means
chine’s stability around the vertical axis. If the corrective
of a transmitter control assigned in the “gyro” line in the
system is not fast enough, there is a danger that the
»contr set.« menu (see page 62). This could be transmodel’s tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain
mitter control 5 (CTRL 5), which would provide infinitely
settings, and you then have to reduce gyro gain further
variable gyro gain control:
using the INC / DEC buttons to adjust the pre-set “Gyro”
• At the centre position of this transmitter control
value to eliminate the oscillation.
the gyro effect always corresponds to the settings
If the model is flying forward at high speed, or hovering
selected here.
in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilising
• If you press the INC / DEC button in the direction of
effect of the vertical fin combined with the gyro’s stabilis82 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
ing effect may be an over-reaction which manifests itself
as tail oscillation. In order to obtain optimum stabilisation
from a gyro in all flight situations, you should make use
of the facility to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter via
the INC / DEC buttons (CTRL 5).
inp8
(Input 8)
ch1
thro
tail
ch1
gyro
inp8
normal
0%
0%
SEL
The adjustment facilities in this line of the menu are only
relevant if your model helicopter is fitted with a speed
governor (regulator) which maintains a constant system
rotational speed, and you wish to control it using the
“classic” method. The settings should then be entered
in accordance with the instructions supplied with the
governor you intend to use.
However, it is more convenient – and also safer – to
adopt the method described previously on this page,
using the “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” mixer.
Adjusting the throttle and collective pitch curves
A practical procedure
Although the throttle and collective pitch control systems
are based on separate servos, they are always operated
in parallel by the throttle / collective pitch stick (except
when auto-rotation is invoked). The Helicopter program
automatically couples the functions in the required way.
In the mx-16iFS program the trim lever of control function 1 only affects the throttle servo, i. e. it acts as idle
trim (see “Digital trims” on page 34).
The process of adjusting “throttle” and collective pitch
correctly, i. e. setting the motor’s power curve to match
the collective pitch setting of the main rotor blades,
is the most important aspect of setting up any model
helicopter. The program of the mx-16iFS provides independent adjustment facilities for the throttle, collective
pitch and torque compensation curves.
These curves can be defined using a maximum of five
reference points. To define the control curves all you
have to do is set individual values for these five points in
order to determine each control curve.
However, before you set up the throttle / collective pitch
function it is important to adjust the mechanical linkages
to all the servos accurately, in accordance with the setup notes provided by the helicopter manufacturer.
Idle setting and throttle curve
Note:
The hover point should always be set to the centre
position of the throttle / collective pitch stick.
The diagram shows a curve with
a slightly altered throttle setting
below the hover point at the centre
of stick travel.
has to be adjusted in the hover range.
Note:
Since electric power systems by their nature require no
idle setting, it is not necessary to adjust the idle value.
However, the matching of the throttle and collective pitch
curve(s) must still be carried out as described here, in a
similar way to a glow-powered helicopter.
The idle setting is adjusted solely using the trim lever
of the Ch 1 function, with the throttle limiter closed, as
described in detail on pages 63 and 64. Reference point
1 of the throttle curve defines the throttle setting when
the helicopter is in a descent, but without affecting the
hover setting.
This is a case where you can exploit flight phase programming to use different throttle curves. An increased
system rotational speed below the hover point proves to
be useful in certain circumstances; for example, for fast,
steep landing approaches with greatly reduced collective
pitch, and for aerobatics.
OUTPUT
+100%
-100%
1
2
3
4
5
Control travel
Different throttle curves are programmed for each flight
phase, so that you can use the optimum set-up both for
hovering and aerobatics:
• Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle
control response and low noise at the hover.
• Higher speed for aerobatics with motor power settings
close to maximum. In this case the throttle curve also
The basic set-up procedure
Although the mx-16iFS transmitter provides a broad
range of adjustment for the collective pitch and throttle curves, it is essential that you first adjust all the
mechanical linkages in the model according to the
information supplied by the helicopter manufacturer, i. e.
all the system linkages should already be approximately
correct in mechanical terms. If you are not sure of this,
any experienced helicopter pilot will be glad to help you
with this basic set-up.
The throttle linkage must be adjusted in such a way
that the throttle is just at the “fully open” position at the
full-throttle setting, or the speed controller or an electric
helicopter is set to full-power. When the throttle limiter
is at the idle position, the Ch 1 trim lever should just be
able to close the throttle completely, without the servo
striking its mechanical end-stop (quick throttle adjustment using the “digital trim”: see page 34). With an
electric helicopter the motor should stop reliably when
the throttle limiter is closed.
Take your time, and carry out these adjustments very
carefully by adjusting the mechanical linkage and / or
changing the linkage point on the servo output arm or
the throttle lever. Only when you are confident that all is
well should you think about optimising and fine-tuning
the throttle servo using the transmitter’s electronic facilities.
Caution:
Read all you can about motors and helicopters, so
that you are aware of the inherent dangers and the
cautionary measures required before you attempt to
start the motor for the first time!
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
83
Hover
point
-100%
1
2
3
4
5
Control travel
84
+100%
OUTPUT
b) Rotational speed too high
Remedy: increase the
blade pitch angle for collective pitch at Point 3 of
the stick travel in the “Ch1
¼ collective pitch curve”
menu, as shown in the
graph.
OUTPUT
+100%
Hover
point
-100%
1
2
3
4
5
Control travel
b) Rotational speed too low
Remedy: reduce the blade
pitch angle for collective
pitch at Point 3 of the
stick travel in the “Ch1 ¼
collective pitch curve”, as
shown in the graph.
+100%
Hover
point
-100%
1
2
3
4
5
Control travel
+100%
OUTPUT
a) Rotational speed too low
Remedy: increase the
value for the throttle servo
parameter at Point 3 of the
stick travel in the “Ch1 ¼
throttle” mixer, as shown in
the graph.
a) Rotational speed too high
Remedy: reduce the throttle opening in the “Ch1 ¼
throttle” mixer at Point 3 of
the stick travel, as shown in
the graph.
Hover
point
-100%
1
2
3
4
Control travel
5
Important:
It is important to persevere with this adjustment procedure until the model hovers at the correct rotational
speed at the centre point of the throttle / collective pitch
stick. All the other model settings depend upon the correct setting of these parameters!
The standard set-up
The remainder of the standard adjustment procedure
is completed on the basis of the fundamental set-up
which you have just carried out, i. e. we now assume that
the model hovers in normal flight at the centre point of
the throttle / collective pitch stick, with the correct rotor
speed. This means that your model helicopter is capable
of hovering and also flying circuits in all phases whilst
maintaining a constant system rotational speed.
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
The climb setting
The combination of throttle hover setting, collective pitch
setting for the hover and the maximum collective pitch
setting (Point 5) now provides you with a simple method
of achieving constant system rotational speed from the
hover right to maximum climb.
Start by placing the model in an extended vertical climb,
holding the collective pitch stick at its end-point: motor
speed should not alter compared with the hover setting.
If motor speed falls off in the climb, when the throttle is
already fully open and no further power increase is possible (this assumes that the motor is correctly adjusted),
then you should reduce maximum blade pitch angle at
full deflection of the collective pitch stick, i. e. the value
at Point 5. Conversely, if motor speed rises during the
vertical climb, you should increase the pitch angle. This
is done on the “Collective pitch” graphic page by moving the vertical line to Point 5 using the collective pitch
stick, and changing its value accordingly using the rotary
cylinder.
+100%
OUTPUT
1. The model does not lift off until the collective
pitch stick is above the centre point.
2. The model lifts off below the centre point.
OUTPUT
With the basic set-up completed, it should be possible to
start the motor in accordance with the operating instructions supplied with it, and adjust the idle setting using
the trim lever of the throttle / collective pitch stick. The
idle position which you set is indicated in the transmitter’s basic screen display by a horizontal bar in the
display of the Ch 1 trim lever’s position. Refer to page 34
of this manual for a full explanation of the digital trims.
Around the mid-point of the collective pitch stick the
model should lift off the ground and hover at approximately the rotational speed you wish to use. If this is not
the case, correct the settings as follows:
This diagram only shows the
changes to the collective pitch
maximum value.
Hover
point
-100%
1
2
3
4
5
Control travel
Now bring the model back to the hover, which again
should coincide with the mid-point of the Ch 1 stick.
If you find that the collective pitch stick now has to be
moved from the mid-point in the direction of “higher”,
then you should correct this deviation by slightly increasing the collective pitch angle at the hover – i. e. Point 3 –
until the model again hovers at the stick centre point.
Conversely, if the model hovers below the mid-point,
correct this by reducing the pitch angle again.
You may find that it is also necessary to correct the
throttle opening at the hover point (Point 3) in the “Ch 1
¼ throttle” menu.
This diagram only shows the
change in the hover point, i. e. collective pitch minimum and maximum have been left at -100% and
+100% respectively.
OUTPUT
+100%
-100%
1
2
3
4
5
Control travel
Continue adjusting these settings until you really do
achieve constant main rotor speed over the full control
range between hover and climb.
The descent adjustment should now be carried out from
a safe height by fully reducing collective pitch to place
the model in a descent from forward flight; adjust the collective pitch minimum value (Point 1) so that the model
descends at an angle of 60 … 80°. This is done on the
“Collective pitch” graphic page by moving the vertical
line to Point 1 using the collective pitch stick, and adjusting the value accordingly using the rotary cylinder.
OUTPUT
+100%
As an example, this diagram
shows only the changes in the
collective pitch minimum value.
Hover
point
-100%
1
2
3
4
5
Control travel
Once the model descends reliably as described, adjust
the value for “Throttle minimum” – the value of Point 1
on the graph of the “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” mixer – so that
system rotational speed neither increases nor declines.
This completes the set-up procedure for throttle and
collective pitch.
This causes the rotor to accelerate quickly, resulting in
premature wear of the clutch and gear train. The main
rotor blades are generally free to swivel, and they may
be unable to keep pace with such swift acceleration, in
which case they might respond by swinging far out of
their normal position, perhaps resulting in a boom strike.
Once the motor is running, you should s l o w l y increase system rotational speed using the throttle limiter.
Important final notes
Before you start the motor, check carefully that the throttle limiter is completely closed, so that the throttle can
be controlled by the Ch 1 trim lever alone. If the throttle
is too far open when you switch the transmitter on, you
will see and hear a warning. If you ignore this and start
the motor with the throttle too far advanced, there is a
danger that the motor will immediately run up to speed
after starting, and the centrifugal clutch will at once
engage. For this reason you should:
always grasp the rotor head firmly
when starting the motor.
However, if you accidentally start the motor with the
throttle open, the rule is this:
Don’t panic!
Hang on to the rotor head regardless!
Don’t let go!
Immediately close the throttle, even though there may
be a risk of damaging the helicopter’s drive train, because:
it is vital that YOU ensure
that the helicopter cannot possibly
move off by itself in an uncontrolled manner.
The cost of repairing a clutch or even the motor itself is
negligible compared to the damage which a model helicopter can cause if its spinning rotor blades are allowed
to wreak havoc.
Make sure that nobody else is standing in
the primary hazard zone around the helicopter.
You must never switch abruptly from idle to the flight
setting by suddenly increasing system rotational speed.
Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter
85
Helicopter mixers
Auto-rotation settings
Auto-rotation allows full-size and model helicopters to
land safely in a crisis, i. e. if the power plant should fail.
It can also be used if the tail rotor should fail, in which
case cutting the motor and carrying out an auto-rotation
landing is the only possible way of avoiding a highspeed uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis,
invariably terminating in a catastrophic crash. And that is
the reason why switching INTO auto-rotation occurs with
zero delay.
When you switch to the auto-rotation phase the helicopter mixers change as shown in this screen shot:
ptch
thro
tail
gyro
inp8
Autorot
90%
0%
0%
0%
SEL
During an auto-rotation descent the main rotor is not
driven by the motor; it is kept spinning only by the
airflow through the rotor disc caused by the speed of the
descent. The rotational energy stored in the still spinning
rotor can be exploited to allow the machine to flare out,
but this can only be done once. For this reason “autos”
are only likely to be successful if the pilot has plenty of
experience in handling model helicopters, and has also
set up the appropriate functions with great care.
Once you have sufficient experience you should practise
auto-rotation landings at regular intervals, not only so
that you can demonstrate your all-round flying skill by
flying the manoeuvre in competitions, but also so that
you are in a position to land the helicopter undamaged
from a great height if the motor should fail. For this
purpose the program provides a range of adjustment
86
facilities which are designed to help you fly your helicopter in its unpowered state. Please note that the rotation
setting takes the form of a complete third flight phase,
for which all the adjustment facilities are available which
can be varied separately for all flight phases, especially
trims, collective pitch curve settings etc..
ptch
(Pitch curve (ch1 ¼ Pitch))
In powered flight the maximum blade pitch angle is
limited by the motor power which is available; however,
in auto-rotation the angle is only limited by the point
at which the airflow over the main rotor blades breaks
away. Nevertheless, to provide sufficient upthrust even
when rotational speed is falling off, it is necessary to set
a greater maximum collective pitch value. Press the rotary cylinder or ENTER to select the graph page of “Collective pitch”, and then move the vertical line to Point 5
using the transmitter stick. Start by setting a value which
is about 10 to 20% higher than the normal collective
pitch maximum. Do not initially set a much higher value
compared with normal flight, because collective pitch
control will then differ too greatly from the machine’s
usual response after you have thrown the switch. The
danger is that you will over-control the helicopter, and it
may balloon up again during the flare following the autorotation descent. If this happens, the rotational speed
of the main rotor will quickly decline to the point where
it collapses, and the helicopter ends up crashing to the
ground from a considerable height.
Under certain circumstances the collective pitch minimum setting may also differ from the normal flight setting; this depends on your piloting style for normal flying.
In any case you must set a sufficiently generous collective pitch minimum value at Point 1 to ensure that your
model can be brought from forward flight at moderate
Program description: helicopter mixers / auto-rotation – model helicopter
speed into a descent of around 60 … 70° when collective pitch is reduced to minimum. Most helicopter pilots
already use such a setting for normal flying, and if this
applies to you, you can simply adopt the same value.
If you normally allow your model to “fall” at a shallower
angle, increase the value for “Point 1”, and vice versa.
Approach angle
in strong
wind
in moderate
wind
no wind
Approach angle
under varying wind
conditions.
75°
60°
45°
For auto-rotation the collective pitch stick itself may not
be positioned right at the bottom of its travel; typically it
will be between the hover position and the bottom endpoint, giving the pilot scope for correction if necessary,
i. e. the chance to adjust the model’s pitch inclination
using the pitch-axis control.
You can shorten the approach by pulling back slightly on
the pitch-axis stick and gently reducing collective pitch,
or alternatively extend the approach by pushing forward
on the pitch-axis stick and gently increasing collective
pitch.
thro
(Throttle curve)
In a competition the pilot is expected to cut the motor
completely, but for practice purposes this is certainly
inconvenient, as after every practice “auto” you would
have to start the motor again.
For practice, then, you should set the value in this line
so that the motor runs at a reliable idle during auto-
rotation; for an electric helicopter the motor should be
reliably “off”.
gyro
(static torque compensation)
For normal flying the tail rotor is set up in such a way
that it compensates for motor torque when the helicopter is hovering. This means that it already generates
a certain amount of thrust even in its neutral position.
The level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control
system, and also by the various mixers which provide all
manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor trim
is also used to compensate for varying weather conditions, fluctuations in system rotational speed and other
influences.
However, in an auto-rotation descent the main rotor
spins according to the windmill principle, i. e. it is not
driven by the motor, and therefore there is no torque
effect for which compensation is required, i. e. which
the tail rotor would have to correct. For this reason all
the appropriate mixers are automatically switched off in
auto-rotation mode.
However, the basic tail rotor setting has to be different
for auto-rotation, as the compensatory thrust described
above is no longer required.
Stop the motor and place the helicopter horizontal on
the ground. With the transmitter and receiving system
switched on, select the «Auto-rotation» flight phase.
Fold both tail rotor blades down and change the blade
pitch angle to zero degrees using the “Tail rotor” menu.
Viewed from the rear, the tail rotor blades should now lie
parallel to each other.
Depending on the friction and running resistance of the
gearbox, you may find that the fuselage still yaws slightly
in an auto-rotation descent. If necessary, the relatively
slight torque which causes this effect must then be
corrected by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle.
This value will always be a small figure between zero
degrees and a pitch angle opposed to the direction of
tail rotor pitch required for normal flight.
Program description: helicopter mixers / auto-rotation – model helicopter
87
General notes regarding freely programmable mixers
The two menus »wing mixer« and »heli mixer«, as
described on the preceding pages, contain a wide range
of ready-programmed coupling functions. The basic
meaning of mixers has already been explained on page
72, together with the principle on which they work. In the
following section you will find more general information
relating to “free mixers”:
In addition to the pre-programmed mixers mentioned
above, the mx-16iFS offers three freely programmable
linear mixers which can be used in every model memory; their inputs and outputs can be selected to suit your
exact requirements.
Any control function (1 to 8), or what is known as a
“switch channel” (see below) can be assigned as the
input signal of a “free mixer”. The signal present at the
control channel, and passed to the mixer input, is determined by the transmitter control and any control characteristics as defined, for example, in the »D/R expo« and
»contr set.« menus.
The mixer output acts upon a freely selectable control
channel (1 to max. 8 – depending on receiver type).
Before the signal is passed to the associated servo, the
only influences which can act upon it are those defined
in the »servo set.« menu, i. e. the servo reverse, neutral
point offset and travel functions.
One control function can be set up to affect several
mixer inputs simultaneously, if, for example, you wish to
arrange several mixers to operate in parallel.
Conversely it is possible for several mixer outputs to
affect one and the same control channel.
The following description of the free mixers includes
examples of such arrangements.
In software terms the default setting for any “free mixer”
is that it is constantly switched on, but it is also possible
88
Program description: free mixers
to assign an optional ON / OFF switch to it. However,
since there are so many functions to which switches can
potentially be assigned, you should take care not to assign dual functions to particular switches accidentally.
The two important mixer parameters are as follows:
• The mixer ratio, which defines the extent to which
the input signal acts on the output of the control
channel which is programmed as the mixer output.
• The neutral point, which is also termed the “offset”.
The offset is that point on the travel of a transmitter
control (stick, rotary proportional knob CTRL 7 or
INC / DEC buttons CTRL 5 / 6) at which the mixer
has no influence on the control channel connected
to its output. Normally this is the centre point of the
transmitter control, but the offset can be placed at
any point on the control’s travel.
Switch channel “S” as mixer input
In some cases a constant control signal is all that is
required as the mixer input; a typical application would
be for slight up-elevator trim when an aero-tow coupling
is closed – independently of the normal elevator trim.
If you then assign a switch, you can switch to and fro
between the two mixer end-points, and adjust the supplementary elevator trim deflection by altering the mixer
input.
To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input control function in the software is designated “S” for “switch
channel”. If you do not want the “target channel” to be affected by the “normal” transmitter control, the control can
be de-coupled from the function input of the associated
control channel by entering “empty” in the »contr set.«
menu; see pages 58 and 60. The following menu description includes an example which makes this function clear.
Free mixers
Linear mixers
Regardless of the selected model type, three linear mixers are available for each of the twelve model memories,
with the additional possibility of non-linear characteristic
curves.
In this first section we will concentrate on the programming procedure for the first screen page. We will then
move on to the method of programming mixer ratios, as
found on the second screen page of this menu.
The basic programming procedure
1. Select mixer 1 ... 3 with the rotary cylinder pressed in.
2. Press the rotary cylinder. The input field “fro(m)” is
highlighted (inverse video).
3. Define the mixer input “from” using the rotary cylinder.
4. Press the rotary cylinder, move to SEL under the “to”
column using the rotary cylinder, and press the rotary
cylinder once more.
The input field “to” is now highlighted.
5. Define the mixer input “to” using the rotary cylinder.
6. Press the rotary cylinder, and (optionally) move to
SEL under the “type” column using the rotary cylinder; you can now include the Ch1 … Ch 4 trim lever
for the mixer input signal (“tr” for trim) …
… and / or move to the switch symbol, press the rotary cylinder again, and assign a switch if desired.
using the rota7. Press the rotary cylinder, move to
ry cylinder, and press ENTER.
8. Define the mixer ratios on the second screen page.
9. Press ESC to switch back to the first page.
“fro(m)” column
Press the rotary cylinder, then rotate it to select one of
the control functions 1 … 8 or S in the highlighted field
of the selected mixer line.
In the interests of clarity, the control functions 1 … 4 are
abbreviated as follows when dealing with the fixed-wing
mixers:
c1
Throttle / airbrake stick
ar
Aileron stick
el
Elevator stick
rd
Rudder stick
… and in the Heli program:
1
Throttle / collective pitch stick
2
Roll stick
3
Pitch-axis stick
4
Tail rotor stick
“to” column.
At this point you can define the control channel as the
mixer destination, i. e. the mixer output. At the same time
additional fields appear in the bottom line of the screen:
M1
M2
M3
6
c1
S
typ fro
SEL
el
1
C1
el
el
3
to
SEL
In this example three mixers have already been defined.
The second mixer (“Brake ¼ elev”) is already familiar to
us from the »wing mixer« menu. As a general rule you
should always use these pre-programmed mixers first if
possible.
However, if you need asymmetrical mixer ratios on both
sides of centre, or have to offset the mixer neutral point,
then you should set or leave the pre-set mixers at “0”,
and program one of the free mixers instead.
Note:
Don’t forget to assign a transmitter control to the selected control functions 5 ... 8 in the »contr set.« menu.
Erasing mixers
If you need to erase a mixer that you have already defined, simply press the CLEAR button in the highlighted
field of the “fro(m)” column.
“S” for switch channel
The letter “S” (switch channel) in the “from” column has
the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer
input, e. g. in order to apply a little extra up-elevator trim
when an aero-tow coupling is closed, as mentioned
earlier.
Once you have assigned a control function or the letter
“S”, an additional SEL field appears in the …
Mixer switches
In our example above, a physical switch “1” and the
control switch “C1” have been assigned to the two linear
mixers 1 and 2, and switch 3 to mixer 3.
The switch symbol to the right of the switch number
shows the current status of that switch.
Any mixer to which no switch has been assigned in
column is permanently switched on.
the
Program description: free mixers
89
“Typ(e)” column
(including the trim)
If you wish, and if you are using one of the primary control functions 1 … 4 (sticks), you can set the trim value
of the digital trim lever to affect the mixer input. Use the
rotary cylinder to select “tr” in the highlighted field for the
mixer you are programming.
The effect of the Ch 1 trim lever on the mixer output varies according to the function which has been assigned
to it in the »base sett.« menu (pages 46 and 50) in the
“motor on C1” column for fixed-wing models.
Additional special features of free mixers
If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its
output, e. g. “c1 ¼ c1”, exotic results can be obtained
in conjunction with the option of switching a free mixer
on and off. You will find one typical example of this on
pages 102 … 104.
Before we come to setting mixer ratios, we have to
consider what happens if a mixer input is allowed to act
on the pre-set coupling of aileron servos, flap servos or
collective pitch servos:
• Fixed-wing models:
Depending on the number of wing servos set in the
“Aileron / Flap” line of the »base sett.« menu, receiver outputs 2 and 5 are reserved for the aileron servos, and outputs 6 and 7 for the two flap servos, as
special mixers are assigned to these functions.
If mixer outputs are programmed to this type of coupled function, you have to consider their effect on the
associated pair of wing flaps, according to the control channel:
Program description: free mixers
Effect
»servo set.« menu, and / or reduce the mixer values.
N.N.* ¼ 2
Servo pair 2 + 5 responds with aileron
function
N.N.* ¼ 5
Servo pair 2 + 5 responds with flap
function
N.N.* ¼ 6
Servo pair 6 + 7 responds with flap
function
N.N.* ¼ 7
Servo pair 6 + 7 responds with aileron
function
Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point
Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of
the mixer functions, we can move on to the method of
programming linear and non-linear mixer curves.
For each of the three available mixers the mixer curves
are programmed on a second page of the screen
display. Select the number of the mixer you wish to
adjust, and move to the
symbol at bottom right of
the screen using the rotary cylinder. A brief press on the
rotary cylinder or ENTER now takes you to the graphic
page.
• Model helicopters:
Depending on the type of helicopter, up to four servos may be employed for collective pitch control;
these will be connected to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3
and 5. The mx-16iFS software links them together to
provide the functions collective pitch, roll and pitchaxis.
It is not advisable to mix one of the transmitter controls into these occupied channels using the free mixers available outside the »heli mixer« menu, as you
may inadvertently generate some extremely complex
and unwanted inter-actions. One of the few exceptions to this rule is “Collective pitch trim via a separate transmitter control”; see example 2 on page 93.
Important note:
When dealing with the inter-action of multiple mixers
on one control channel, it is essential to remember that
the mixed travels of the individual mixers are cumulative
when multiple stick commands are made simultaneously, and there is then a danger that the servo concerned
may strike its mechanical end-stops. If you encounter
this problem, simply reduce the servo travel in the
*
90
Mixer
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
Setting up linear mixer values
In the next section we will describe a typical practical
application, by defining a linear mixer curve intended to
solve the following problem:
We have a powered model with two flap servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7, which were programmed
as “… 2fl” in the “Aileron / Flap” line of the »base sett.«
menu. These control surfaces are to be employed as
landing flaps, i. e. when the associated transmitter
control is operated, they deflect down only. However, this
flap movement requires an elevator trim correction to
counteract the resultant pitch trim change.
In the »contr set.« menu, assign the rotary proportional
control CTRL 7 to input 6. The control assigned to input
6 now controls the two servos connected to receiver
outputs 6 and 7 in the standard way, operating as simple
wing flaps.
»contr set.« menu
I5
I6
I7
MIX 1
el
off
empty + 100% + 100%
ct rl7 + 100% + 100%
empty + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
Note:
If you assign a transmitter control to input 7 and select
two flap servos, input 7 is automatically blocked to avoid
possible malfunctions.
Rotate the transmitter control to its left-hand end-point,
and adjust the landing flap linkages so that they are in
the neutral position at this setting. If you now turn the
knob to the right, the flaps should deflect down; if they
move up, you must reverse the direction of servo rotation.
Now we turn to the first mixer on the screen on page 89;
this is the mixer “6 ¼ el”, to which switch 1 has been
assigned:
M1
M2
M3
6
6
c1
S
typ fro
SEL
el
1
C1
el
el
3
to
SEL
Use the rotary cylinder to move to the
symbol at bottom right of the screen. Pressing the rotary cylinder now
switches to the second screen page:
If this display appears, you have not activated the mixer
by operating the assigned external switch – in this case
“1”. To correct this, operate the switch:
MIX 1
tr v +
offs
6
el
0% + 0%
0%
SYM ASY
The full-height vertical line in the graph represents the
current position of the transmitter control assigned to input 6. (In the above graph this is located at the left-hand
edge because CTRL 7 is at its left-hand end-point, as
already mentioned.) The full-length horizontal line shows
the mixer ratio, which currently has the value of zero
over the whole stick travel; this means that the elevator
will not “follow” when the flaps are operated.
The first step is to define the offset (mixer neutral point).
To do this press the rotary cylinder and move to the
“Offs” line:
MIX 1
tr v +
offs
6
el
control travel at which the mixer has NO influence on the
channel connected to its output. By default this point is
set to the centre position.
However, in our example the neutral (retracted) position
of the flaps is located at the left-hand stop of the rotary
proportional control, and in this position the elevator
must not be affected. We therefore have to shift the mixer neutral point exactly to that position. Turn the control
to the left-hand end-stop – if you have not already done
so – and select STO using the rotary cylinder. Press the
rotary cylinder, and the dotted vertical line now moves to
this point – the new mixer neutral point – which always
retains the “OUTPUT” value of zero in accordance with
the mixer definition.
As it happens, this setting is difficult to show in a
screen shot, so we will change the “offset” value to
only -75%.
MIX 1
tr v +
offs
6
el
0% + 0%
75%
STO CLR
Note:
If you wish, you can move the mixer neutral point back
to centre by selecting CLR using the rotary cylinder, and
pressing the rotary cylinder.
0% + 0%
0%
SYM ASY
The dotted vertical line indicates the position of the
mixer neutral point (“offset”), i. e. that point along the
Program description: free mixers
91
Symmetrical mixer ratios
The next step is to define the mixer values above and
below the mixer neutral point, starting from the current position of the mixer neutral point. Select the SYM
field, so that you can set the mixer value symmetrically
relative to the offset point you have just programmed.
Press the rotary cylinder, then set the values in the two
highlighted fields within the range -150% to +150%.
Remember that the set mixer value always refers to the
signal from the associated transmitter control (control
signal)! Setting a negative mixer value reverses the
direction of the mixer.
Pressing the CLEAR button erases the mixer ratio in the
highlighted field.
The “optimum” value for our purposes will inevitably
need to be established through a flight testing programme.
MIX 1
6
el
tr v + 20% + 20%
75%
offs
SYM ASY
Since we previously set the mixer neutral point to -75%
of control travel, the elevator (“el”) will already exhibit a
(slight) “down-elevator” effect at the neutral point of the
landing flaps, and this, of course, is not wanted. To correct this we shift the mixer neutral point back to -100%
control travel, as described earlier.
MIX 1
6
el
tr v + 20% + 20%
100%
offs
STO CLR
If you were now to reset the offset from -75% to, say, 0%
control travel, the screen would look like this:
MIX 1
6
el
tr v + 20% + 20%
0%
offs
STO CLR
Asymmetrical mixer ratios
For many applications it is necessary to set up different
mixer values on either side of the mixer neutral point.
If you set the offset of the mixer used in our example (“6
¼ el”) back to 0%, as shown in the picture above, then
select the ASY field and turn the rotary proportional
control in the appropriate direction, the mixer ratio for
each direction of control can be set separately, i. e. to left
and right of the selected offset point:
MIX 1
6
el
tr v + 44% + 22%
0%
offs
SYM ASY
Note:
If you are setting up a switch channel mixer of the “S ¼
N.N.*” type, you must operate the assigned switch to
*
92
Program description: free mixers
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
achieve this effect. The vertical line then jumps between
the left and right sides.
Examples:
1. To open and close the aero-tow release the switch
SW 3 has already been assigned to control channel
8 in the »contr set.« menu.
I6
I7
I8
ctrl7 + 100% + 100%
empty + 100% + 100%
+ 100% + 100%
3
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
In the meantime you have carried out a few aero-tow
flights, which showed that you always needed to hold
in slight up-elevator during the tow. You now wish to
set the elevator servo (connected to receiver output
3) to slight “up” trim when the tow release is closed.
In the screen familiar from page 89 we have set up
the third linear mixer to accomplish this, using the
switch channel “S” as the mixer input. Now move the
selected switch to the OFF position, and select the
symbol …
M1
M2
M3
6
c1
S
typ fro
SEL
1
el
C1
el
3
el
to
SEL
… to move to the second page. Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to select the “Offs” line, and press
the rotary cylinder again: the offset value jumps to
+XXX% or -XXX%, depending on the selected switch
position.
Swashplate mixers
Collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis mixers
MIX 3
S
el
tr v + 0% + 0%
offs + 100%
STO CLR
Now hold the rotary cylinder pressed in again to
move to the “Travel” line, where you set the required
mixer input – after moving the selected switch to the
mixer ON position.
MIX 3
el
S
tr v + 10% + 10%
offs + 100%
SYM ASY
2. The following example applies to model helicopters:
In the Helicopter program you may wish to assign
one of the two INC / DEC buttons (CTRL 5 or 6) to
the collective pitch trim function. This is the procedure: in the »contr set.« menu assign one of these
two transmitter controls to input “I8”. Now simply define a free mixer “8 ¼ 1” with a symmetrical mixer
ratio of, say, 25%. Due to the internal coupling, this
transmitter control now acts equally on all the collective pitch servos you are using, without affecting the
throttle servo.
MIX 1
8
1
tr v + 25% + 25%
0%
offs
SYM ASY
S P
ptch
roll
nick
–
M I X E
+
+
+
R
61%
61%
61%
SEL
In the “Swashplate” line of the »base sett.« menu you
have already defined the number of servos which are installed in your helicopter to provide collective pitch control; see page 50. With this information the mx-16iFS
program automatically superimposes the functions for
roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch as required, i. e. you
do not need to define any additional mixers yourself.
If you have a model helicopter which only has a single
collective pitch servo, the “Swashplate mixer” menu
point is – of course – superfluous, since the three
swashplate servos for collective pitch, pitch-axis and
roll are controlled independently of each other. In this
case the swashplate mixer menu does not appear in
the multi-function list. With all other swashplate linkages
employing 2 … 4 collective pitch servos, the mixer ratios
and directions are set up by default, as can be seen in
the screen shot above. The pre-set value is +61% in
each case, but the value can be varied within the range
-100% to +100% using the rotary cylinder, after first
pressing the rotary cylinder.
Pressing the CLEAR button resets the mixer input in the
highlighted field to the default value of +61%.
If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, roll
and pitch-axis) does not follow the transmitter sticks in
the proper manner, then the first step is to change the
mixer directions (+ or -), before you attempt to correct
the directions of servo rotation.
HEIM mechanics with two collective pitch servos:
• The collective pitch mixer acts on the two collective
pitch servos connected to receiver sockets 1 + 2;
• the roll mixer also acts on the two collective pitch
servos, but the direction of rotation of one servo is
reversed, and
• the pitch-axis mixer acts on the pitch-axis servo
alone.
Note:
Ensure that the servos do not strike their mechanical
end-stops if you change the servo mixer values.
Program description: Swashplate mixers – model helicopter
93
mx-16iFS programming techniques
Preparation, using a fixed-wing model aircraft as an example
Programming model data into an mx-16iFS …
… is easier than it might appear at first sight.
There is one basic rule which applies equally to all
programmable radio control transmitters: if the programming is to go “smoothly” and the systems work as
expected, the receiving system components must first
be installed correctly in the model, i. e. the mechanical
systems must be first-rate. This means: ensure that each
servo is at its correct neutral position when you fit the
output lever or disc and connect the linkage to it. If you
find this is not the case, correct it! Remove the output
arm, rotate it by one or more splines and secure it again.
If you use a servo tester, e. g. the Digital Servo Analyzer,
Order No. 763, to centre the servos, you will find it very
easy to find the “correct” position.
Virtually all modern transmitters offer facilities for offsetting the neutral position of servos, but this is no substitute for a correct mechanical installation; this function is
only intended for fine tuning. Any substantial deviation
from the “0” position may result in additional asymmetry
when the signal undergoes further processing in the
transmitter. Think of it this way: if the chassis of a car
is distorted, you may be able to force the vehicle to run
straight by holding the steering wheel away from centre,
but it does not make the chassis any less bent, and the
basic problem remains.
Another important point is to set up the correct control
travels wherever possible by using the appropriate linkage points in the mechanical system; this is much more
efficient than making major changes to the travel settings at the transmitter. The same rule applies: electronic
travel adjustment facilities are designed primarily to
compensate for minor manufacturing tolerances in the
servos and for fine adjustment, and not to compensate
94
Programming example: fixed-wing model
for poor-quality construction and defective installation
methods.
If two separate aileron servos are installed in a fixedwing model aircraft, the ailerons can also be employed
as flaps by deflecting both of them down, and as airbrakes by deflecting both of them up – simply by setting
up a suitable mixer (see the section starting on the next
double page). Such systems are generally more often
used in gliders and electric gliders than in power models.
by the down-movement of the flaps rather than the
up-movement of the ailerons, so in this case the servo
output arms should be angled aft, i. e. offset towards the
trailing edge of the wing, as this makes greater travel
available for the down-movement. When this combination of lowered flaps and raised ailerons is used, the
ailerons should only be raised to a moderate extent, as
their primary purpose in this configuration is to stabilise
and control the model rather than act as brakes.
You can “see” the difference in terms of braking effect by
deploying the crow system, then looking over and under
the wing from the front: the larger the projected area of
the deflected control surfaces, the greater the braking
effect.
Outboard ailerons
In such cases the servo output arms should be offset
forward by one spline relative to the neutral point, i. e.
towards the leading edge of the wing, and fitted on the
servo output shaft in that position.
The mechanical differential achieved by this asymmetrical installation takes into account the fact that the
braking effect of the up-going ailerons increases with
their angle of deflection, and this means that much less
travel is usually required in the down-direction than the
up-direction.
Similar reasoning applies to the installation of the flap
linkage when separately actuated flap servos are installed, designed to be used in a butterfly (crow) system.
Here again an asymmetrical linkage point is useful. The
braking effect of the crow system is provided primarily
Inboard camberchanging flaps
(This type of asymmetrical installation of the servo
output arms can also make sense when you are setting
up split flaps or landing flaps on a power model.)
Once you have completed your model and set up the
mechanical systems accurately in this way, you are
ready to start programming the transmitter. The instructions in this section are intended to reflect standard
practice by describing the basic general settings first,
and then refining and specialising them to complete the
set-up. After the initial test-flight, and in the course of
continued test-flying, you may need to adjust one or other of the model’s settings. As your piloting skills improve
and you gain experience, you might feel the need to try
out different control systems and other refinements, and
to cater for these requirements you may find that the text
deviates from the obvious order of options, or that one
or other of the options is mentioned more than once.
On the other hand, it may certainly occur that not every
step described in these instructions is relevant to a
particular model, just as some users might miss the
description of a particular step which is relevant to his
model only …
At this point, just before you start programming the
model data, it is worthwhile thinking carefully about a
sensible layout of the transmitter controls.
If the model in question is one with the emphasis on
“power” – whether the power of an electric motor or
internal combustion engine (glow motor) – you will
probably encounter few problems in this matter, because
the two stick units are primarily employed to control the
four basic functions “power control (= throttle)”, “rudder”,
“elevator” and “aileron”. Nevertheless, you still have to
call up the ...
»base sett.«
(pages 46 … 49)
model name GRAUBELE
1
stick mode
motor on C1 no
tail type
normal
SEL
… menu and define your preferred throttle direction,
i. e. throttle minimum forward (“Idle front”) or back (“Idle
rear”), because the program’s default setting is “no” (no
motor) when you first set up a model memory.
The basic difference between “no” or “no/inv” and
“throttle min. front / rear” is the effect of the Ch 1 trim.
The trim is effective over the full stick travel if “no (/ inv)”
is entered, but it only affects the idle range if you enter
“throttle min. front or rear”. However, it also affects the
“direction of effect” of the Ch 1 stick, i. e. if you switch
from “front” to “rear” or vice versa, you do not also have
to reverse the direction of the throttle (or brake) servo.
For safety reasons you will also see a warning message
if you switch the transmitter on with the throttle stick
positioned too far towards “full-throttle” – but only if you
have already set “throttle min. front or rear”:
0:00
GRAUBELE
Stop
throttle
too Flug
0:00
#01
high
!
«normal
»
9.6V
5:30h
K78 IFS
Your choice of “no” (no motor) or “throttle min. front or
rear” also affects the range of mixers available in the
»wing mixer« menu. The mixers “Brake ¼ N.N.*” are
only present if you choose “no” (no motor) or “no/inv”,
otherwise they are suppressed.
In addition to these basic matters you will certainly need
to consider carefully how best to control any “auxiliary
functions” present on your model.
In contrast, if your model is a glider or electric glider the
whole situation may be rather different. The immediate
question is: what is the best way of operating the motor
and braking system? Now, some solutions have proved
to be practical, and others less so.
For example, it is not a good idea to be forced to let
go of one of the primary sticks in order to extend the
airbrakes or deploy the crow braking system when your
*
glider is on the landing approach. It surely makes more
sense to set up switchable functions for the Ch 1 stick
(see example 4 on page 102), or to assign the braking
system to the throttle stick, and shift the motor control to
a slider – or even a switch. With this type of model the
electric motor is often little more than a “self-launching
system”, and is used either to drag the model into the
sky at full power, or to pull it from one area of lift to the
next at, say half-power, and for such models a throttle
switch is usually quite adequate. If the switch is positioned where you can easily reach it, then you can turn
the motor on and off without having to let go of the sticks
– even on the landing approach.
Incidentally, similar thinking can be applied to flap
control systems, regardless of whether they are “just”
the ailerons, or full-span (combination) control surfaces
which are raised and lowered in parallel.
Once you are satisfied that all these preparations have
been completed successfully, programming can commence.
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
Programming example: fixed-wing model
95
First steps in programming a new model
Example: non-powered fixed-wing model aircraft
When programming a new model you should start with
the ...
“select model”
(page 44)
…, sub-menu in the »mod.mem.« menu, where you
select a vacant memory and confirm your choice by
pressing the ENTER button or the rotary cylinder.
01
02
03
04
05
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
Once you have selected a free model memory, you are
immediately requested to select the type of model to be
programmed:
Sel model type
( empty mod mem )
Since in this example we are setting up a fixed-wing
model, we simply confirm the fixed-wing model symbol
with ENTER or a brief press on the rotary cylinder. The
screen now reverts to the basic display.
Notes:
• Naturally you can also use the pre-defined model
memory 01 for programming your first model; this is
the “fixed-wing model” type by default.
• Once you have called up the “Model select” option it
is not possible to interrupt the process, i. e. you must
choose one or other model type. However, if you
make a mistake you can always correct it simply by
96
Programming example: fixed-wing model
erasing the model memory.
• If the battery voltage is too low, you will not be able
to change model memories for safety reasons. The
screen then displays an appropriate message:
not possible now
vo l t a g e t o o l o w
Now that you have overcome this first hurdle, you can
start programming the actual transmitter settings to suit
the model in the ...
»base sett.«
model name
stick mode
motor on C1
tail type
(pages 46 … 49)
1
no
normal
… menu. At this point you can enter the “Model name”
by selecting the
symbol in order to move to the
character table:
0123456789 : ;
?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
18 or 46 … 47 – is disabled.
• “no/inv”:
The brake system is “retracted” at the back position of the throttle / brake stick; in the »wing mixer«
menu the “Brake ¼ N.N.*” mixers are activated.
The warning message “Throttle too high” – see page
18 or 46 … 47 – is disabled.
• “Throttle min. fr(ont) or re(ar)”:
Ch 1 trim works on idle range (front or rear) only. If
the throttle stick is in the “full-throttle” direction when
you switch the transmitter on, you will be warned of
this with the message “Throttle too high”.
The “Brake ¼ N.N.*” mixers in the »wing mixer«
menu are disabled.
Note:
As mentioned previously, selecting “motor” or “no motor”
also affects the range of mixers available in the »wing
mixer« menu. For this reason we shall initially consider
“no” (no motor) in the following programming example.
In the next two lines you select the basic arrangement
of the servos in the model, and inform the transmitter of
your choice:
stick mode
motor on C1
tail type
aile / flap
model name GRAUB
You should also check the settings for “Stick mode” and
“motor on C1” and change them if necessary:
• “no”:
The brake system is “retracted” at the forward position of the throttle / brake stick; in the »wing mixer«
menu the “Brake ¼ N.N.*” mixers are v.
The warning message “Throttle too high” – see page
tail type:
aile / flap:
*
1
no
normal
2aile
SEL
“normal”, “V-tail”, “delt/FlW“ oder „2elev
sv“
1 or 2 aileron servos and 0 or 2 flap
servos
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
Note:
If your model is fitted with only one camber-changing
flap servo, you should still select “… 2fl”. Later, in the
»wing mixer« menu (see page 72), you should select
the “ail ¼ flaps” mixer and set it to 0%. You can still
exploit all the other mixers available at that point in the
usual way.
»servo set.«
At this juncture – if not before – you should check that
the servos are connected to the receiver in the standard
GRAUPNER sequence:
In this menu you can set various parameters relating to
the servos, i. e. “direction of rotation”, “neutral setting” and “servo travel”, to suit the requirements of the
model.
By “requirements” we mean adjustments to servo centre
and servo travel which are needed to compensate for
minor tolerances in servos and slight inaccuracies on
the model itself.
Auxiliary function
Right flap servo
Flap servo or left flap servo
Right aileron servo
Rudder servo or V-tail
Elevator servo or V-tail
Aileron servo or left aileron servo
Airbrakes or throttle / speed controller
or speed controller (electric)
Receiver power supply
Notes:
• If you set up a V-tail, but the “up / down” and / or “left
/ right” functions work the wrong way round, please
refer to the table in the right-hand column on page
38 for the remedy. The same procedure can be used
if you set up flaperons (superimposed ailerons and
flaps), and they work the wrong way round.
• The following settings apply to a model with a “normal” tail and no motor (“no”); if your model has a Vtail, the settings can be adopted virtually unchanged.
However, if the model is a delta or flying wing, the situation is not quite so straightforward. A special programming example covering this model type will be
found in the section starting on page 108.
S1
S2
S3
(page 56)
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
trav +
rev cent
SYM ASY
SEL SEL
Note:
The facilities provided in this menu for setting asymmetrical servo travels are NOT intended as a means of
setting up differential travel on ailerons and / or camberchanging flaps. There are more suitable options for this
in the form of specific functions in the »wing mixer«
menu; see the first two options in the picture on the right.
Once you have completed the settings described thus
far, a fixed-wing or powered model aircraft (the latter
if you enter the idle direction of the throttle stick in the
“motor on C1” line of the »base sett.« menu) will, in
principle, fly.
However, there are no “refinements” in this set-up, and
it is the refinements which will give you more long-term
pleasure in your flying. Assuming that you are already
capable of controlling your model safely, it’s time to get
a taste of these extra facilities; to this end we now move
on to the ...
»wing mixer«
diff aile.
diff. flaps
rudd
ail
flaps
ail
brak
elev
flap
brak
brak
aile
flap
elev
aile
elev
elev
flap
aile
flap
diff–red
(pages 72 … 76)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
SEL
Note:
This menu will show a varying range of options depending on the information you have entered in the »base
sett.« menu. In the illustration above, the full range is
shown, as generated by the entries “2ail 2fl” in the “aile/
flap” line, and “no(/inv) in the “Motor in C1” line.
Of particular interest at the moment are “diff aile.”
(aileron differential) and the “ail ¼ rudd” (aileron ¼
rudder) mixer, in some cases the combi-switch (coupled
aileron and rudder) and perhaps the mixers “brak ¼
aile” and “brak ¼ flap”.
As already described in detail on page 73, the purpose
of “diff aile.” (aileron differential) is to eliminate adverse
yaw.
When a model aircraft turns, the down-going aileron
produces more drag than the up-going one if both move
through the same angle, and this causes the model to
yaw in the opposite direction to the turn. This can be
eliminated by setting differential servo travel. A value beProgramming example: fixed-wing model
97
tween 20% and 40% is usually a good starting point, but
the “perfect” setting nearly always has to be established
by practical testing.
The same applies to the “diff.flaps” (flap differential)
option if your model also features two camber-changing
flap servos, assuming that the flaps are also to be used
as ailerons, e. g. using the “ail ¼ flaps” mixer.
The “ail ¼ rudd” (aileron à rudder) mixer serves a
similar purpose, but also makes many models generally
easier to handle when turning. A value of around 50%
is usually a practical starting point. However, it is advisable to be able to switch this function off, particularly if
you have ambitions as an aerobatic pilot; this is done by
assigning a physical switch to the mixer (for example,
the writer switches this mixer off “automatically” when he
switches into the “Speed” flight phase, simply by assigning the same switch to both options).
It is usually only necessary to set up a “brak ¼ elev”
(brake ¼ elevator) mixer if your model suffers a marked
pitch trim change (model balloons up or dives) when you
deploy any form of braking system. This problem usually
only arises if ailerons are set to deflect “up” for braking,
or are used in combination with a butterfly (crow) system. If you set up such a mixer it is important to test the
setting at a safe height, and adjust the trim compensation if necessary.
If you have selected “2 aile” or “2ail2fl” in the “Aileron /
Flap” line of the »base sett.« menu …
stick mode
motor on C1
tail type
aile / flap
98
1
no
normal
2aile
SEL
Programming example: fixed-wing model
… and if you wish to be able to deflect both ailerons up
using the throttle / brake stick (Ch 1), then a suitable
value should be entered in the “brak ¼ aile” line.
diff
ail
brak
brak
aile.
rudd
elev
aile
+
+
+
+
0%
0%
0%
0%
SEL
In principle the same applies to the “brak ¼ flap” line,
which also becomes available if you have selected
“2ail 2fl”, although the set value should ensure that the
flaps deflect as far as possible in the downward direction when the brake stick is operated. It is important to
ensure that the servos do not strike their mechanical
end-stops.
If the ailerons are set up to act as simple brakes, or as
part of the braking arrangement in a butterfly (crow) system, then you should always enter a value for “diff-red”
(“differential reduction” – see page 76) – setting 100% is
the safe option here!
Differential reduction means that aileron differential
is suppressed proportionally when you operate the
airbrake stick. The purpose of this is to increase the
down-going aileron travel on the landing approach, with
the aim of improving aileron response.
If the wing is equipped with two camber-changing flap
servos in addition to two separately actuated ailerons,
then the “ail ¼ flap” (aileron à flap) mixer transfers the
aileron movements to the flaps; we suggest that the
flaps should not follow the movement of the ailerons to a
greater extent than about 50%.
Note:
If you have only installed one flap servo, then leave this
mixer at 0%.
The “flap ¼ aile” (flap à aileron) mixer works in the
opposite direction; depending on the layout of the model
we suggest values between about 50% and 100% for
this option. The flaps are controlled using the transmitter
control or switch assigned to the input “E6”. Preferably,
however, the INC / DEC buttons (CTRL 5 and 6) should
be used for this, as their position is automatically stored
separately for each flight phase.
Note:
We strongly recommend that you reduce the travel of
the flaps in the »contr set.« menu, as this gives finer
control of the flap positions using the selected transmitter control.
The remaining options in the »wing mixer« menu are
designed to provide further fine-tuning of multi-flap wing
systems, and are largely self-explanatory.
When you have completed the model-specific settings
up to this point, you are probably ready to consider the
model’s first flight. At this juncture you should certainly
take the time to carry out a series of “dry runs”, i. e.
check all the settings thoroughly while the model is still
on the ground. Remember that a serious programming
error may damage more than just the model. If you are
not sure of any point, please ask an experienced model
pilot for advice.
If during the test phase you realise that one or other of
the settings needs to be changed in order to tailor the
model’s control response to your preferences – perhaps
the servo travels are too great or too small overall – then
we suggest that you turn to the following menu …
»D/R Expo«
aile 111% + 11%
elev 111% + 22%
rudd 100% + 0%
DUAL EXPO
SEL
SEL
(page 66)
2
2
... in order to adjust the overall set-up to suit your
requirements and flying style.
Dual Rates are used to adjust the magnitude of the
stick’s effect (see page 66). However, if it is only the
model’s control response around neutral which is too
powerful for comfortable flying, i. e. the maximum travels
are acceptable, then “Exponential” can be employed,
either instead of Dual Rates or in addition to them. If
a physical switch is assigned to this function, you can
switch between two Dual Rate / Expo settings while the
model is flying.
Programming example: fixed-wing model
99
Expanded programming: including an electric power system
Example 1
»servo set.« menu.
Using the rotary proportional control CTRL 7
If this transmitter control is used, the set-up is extremely
easy. All you have to do is connect the speed controller to any of the receiver servo sockets 5 … 8 which is
vacant.
An electric power system can be controlled in various
ways:
The simplest method of including such a power plant
in a model program is to use the throttle / brake stick
(Ch 1). However, in the preceding programming instructions we have already reserved the Ch 1 transmitter
control for the airbrakes, which means that we have
to explore other possibilities for controlling the motor:
one is to use the switchable solution described in the
section starting on page 102, and another is to use an
alternative transmitter control. One suitable option is
the three-position switch “SW 6/7”, and another is the
rotary proportional control “CTRL 7”, located at top left
of the transmitter. (The two INC / DEC buttons – CTRL
5 and 6 – are less suitable, as you would find it difficult
to cut the motor or increase speed quickly enough in an
emergency.) However, another alternative would be one
of the two-position switches. The main reason for your
choice ought to be that the switch is within easy reach
of your fingers, as this makes it much easier to handlaunch your model.
However, please bear in mind that outputs 2 + 5 and 6
+ 7 may already be linked together, depending on the
model type you have selected and the number of aileron
and flap servos in your model.
Connect your speed controller to the next vacant input,
and assign the rotary proportional control (CTRL 7) to
the selected input – for example, “I8”. This is accomplished in the …
»contr set.« menu.
I6
I7
I8
(page 58)
empty + 100% + 100%
empty + 100% + 100%
ctrl7 + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to select the desired
line. A further press on the rotary cylinder activates
“Switch / transmitter control assignment”. Now turn the
rotary proportional knob. After a brief delay the entry
“ctrl7” will appear in the highlighted field.
In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the
speed controller you are using; alternatively you could
use the “- Travel +” column in the …
S6
S7
S8
(page 56)
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
rev cent
trav +
SYM ASY
SEL SEL
The last stage is to check the settings, so move to the
basic display and then on to »Servo display«. In the
“OFF” position of the rotary cylinder CTRL 7 the control
channel you have selected – in our example this is channel “8” – should be at -100%, and at the “full-throttle”
setting at +100%.
Example 2
Using a two-position switch, SW 1 … 4
This variant implements a pure ON / OFF function, and
results in an “abrupt” motor start-up … unless the speed
controller you are using features what is known as a
“soft start” function.
At the receiving end you need either a simple electronic
switch or – if you want a smoother motor start – a suitable speed controller.
The settings for this arrangement are entered in the …
»contr set.« menu.
I6
I7
I8
(page 58)
empty + 100% + 100%
empty + 100% + 100%
+ 100% + 100%
3
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
First check which receiver socket (5 or higher) is available to connect your speed controller. If you have
100 Programming example: fixed-wing model
assigned two aileron servos in the »base sett.« menu,
and if you have not connected any other auxiliary function, then this would be channel 6; if your model features
two aileron servos and two flap servos, then channel 8
would be available for connecting the speed controller;
the latter option is the one we will use in this example.
Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to select the desired
line in the menu. Press the rotary cylinder again to
activate “Switch or transmitter control assignment”. Now
move the selected switch from the “OFF” position to
the “ON” position. The highlighted field now shows the
switch number together with a symbol which indicates
the direction of switching.
In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the
speed controller you are using; alternatively you could
use the “Servo travel” column in the …
»servo set.« menu.
S6
S7
S8
(page 56)
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
rev cent
trav +
SYM ASY
SEL SEL
The last stage is to check the settings, so move to the
basic display and then on to »Servo display«. In the
“OFF” position of the switch, the control channel you
have selected – in our example this is channel “8” –
should be at -100%, and at the “full-throttle” setting at
+100%.
Example 3
»servo set.« menu.
Using the three-position switch SW 6/7
This variant implements a three-stage solution for
switching an electric motor on and off, and also results
in an “abrupt” motor start-up … unless the speed controller you are using features what is known as a “soft
start” function.
At the receiving end you need a suitable speed controller.
First check which receiver socket (5 or higher) is available to connect your speed controller. If you have
assigned two aileron servos in the »base sett.« menu,
and if you have not connected any other auxiliary function, then this would be channel 6; if your model features
two aileron servos and two flap servos, then channel 8
would be available for connecting the speed controller;
the latter option is the one we will use in this example.
Move to the …
»contr set.« menu.
I6
I7
I8
S6
S7
S8
(page 56)
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
rev cent
trav +
SYM ASY
SEL SEL
The last stage is to check the settings, so move to the
basic display and then on to »Servo display«. In the
(upper) “OFF” position of the three-position switch the
control channel you have selected – in our example this
is channel “8” – should be at -100%. If you now move
the switch to the centre position, the bar should be in the
middle, and at the (lower) “full-throttle” setting it should
be at +100% or vice versa.
(page 58)
empty + 100% + 100%
empty + 100% + 100%
ctrl8 + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
Hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to select the desired
input. Press the rotary cylinder again to activate “Switch
/ transmitter control assignment”. Move the switch SW
6/7. The highlighted field now shows “ctrl8”.
In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the
speed controller you are using; alternatively you could
use the “Servo travel” column in the …
Programming example: fixed-wing model 101
Controlling the electric motor and butterfly (crow) system using the Ch 1 stick
(Butterfly / crow system as landing aid: ailerons up, flaps down)
Example 4
Before we start the programming of this fourth example,
and turn our attention to expanding the basic programming we have already discussed, we need to consider
briefly the position of the throttle / brake stick at “motor
OFF” or “brake OFF”. Usually the Ch 1 stick is moved
forward to open the throttle, and back to extend the
brakes. However, if you adopt this “classic” configuration, and switch, say, from “motor OFF” (stick “back”)
to the braking system, “full brake” would immediately
be applied, and vice versa: if you switch from “brakes
retracted” to power, this would instantly switch to “full
power”.
It is certainly possible to make a “virtue” out of this
“vice”: a “glider pilot” – usually flying with “brakes retracted = forward” will only switch to motor “ON” when
necessary, and then reduce power to suit the situation
(and – we hope – does not forget to move the Ch 1 stick
back to the “forward” position when switching back). In
contrast, a typical “power pilot” would probably operate
with the opposite priority, i. e. he would only switch to
“brake” when necessary, etc.. In any case, it is possible
to avoid these inter-connected effects by positioning the
“zero point” of both systems so that they coincide. The
above considerations mean that a “glider pilot” will probably prefer the “zero point forward” arrangement, while a
“power pilot” might well decide on “zero point back”.
The mx-16iFS transmitter can cope with whichever
arrangement you prefer. However, the following section
assumes that both “OFF” positions will be set to “forward”. If you prefer the alternative arrangement, there
is no problem: the only difference compared with the
version described here is that you would select “no/inv”
in the “motor on C1” line of the »base sett.« menu. All
the other settings can be adopted as described.
In the …
»base sett.«
model name GRAUBELE
1
stick mode
motor on C1 no
tail type
normal
SEL
… menu leave the “motor on C1” line at “no”, or switch
to “no/inv” if preferred. This is essential, otherwise the
“brak ¼ N.N.*” mixers which we need will be suppressed in the »wing mixer« menu.
Important note:
As it is essential to set the motor to “no”, this also
automatically disables the “Throttle too high” poweron warning! For this reason please take great care
to set the Ch 1 stick to the correct position before
you switch the receiving system on.
The next step is to ensure that the speed controller connected to receiver output 1 is switched off “at the right
end”. To accomplish this you may have to move to the …
»servo set.«
S1
S2
S3
(page 56)
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
rev cent
trav +
SYM ASY
SEL SEL
… menu and reverse the direction of servo 1.
For safety’s sake you should check this setting now,
*
102 Programming example: fixed-wing model
(pages 46 … 49)
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
before you continue with the programming procedure.
Take the transmitter and model to a location where it
is safe to run the motor. Switch the transmitter on, and
move the Ch 1 stick to the motor “OFF” position, i. e. either fully forward or back. Hold your model firmly, or ask
a friend to hold it for you. Check that the propeller is free
to rotate without causing havoc, then connect the flight
battery and switch your model’s receiving system on.
If the motor does NOT run when the stick is the appropriate “forward” or “back” position, then everything is in
order. However, check the system anyway by gradually
advancing the stick until the motor begins to run. When
you are satisfied, stop the motor, then switch off the
receiving system in the model and finally switch off the
transmitter.
Note:
If the motor does not start, or spins in the wrong direction, there are other problems which you must correct
before you resume programming. For example, check
the wiring of your motor, and refer to the operating
instructions supplied with your speed controller.
Once you are confident that the direction of the Ch 1
stick is “correct” as far as the motor is concerned, the
next step is to ensure that you can switch its effect on
the motor on and off, so that you can also control the
braking system. This is carried out in the …
»free mixer«
M1
M2
M3
(page 89 … 93)
c1
??
??
typ fro
SEL
c1
??
??
to
SEL
1
… menu where you need to program a free mixer “c1 ¼
c1”. When you have done this, move to the
(switch)
column and assign your selected “change-over switch”
to this mixer; for example SW 1. This is done by activating the switch assignment with a brief press on the
rotary cylinder, and moving the switch from “forward” to
“back”, i. e. towards you.
With the mixer switched on, move to the second screen
page, and there set a starting point of -100% for the
SYMmetrical mixer value.
MIX 1
c1
c1
trv – 100% – 100%
offs + 0%
SYM ASY
Now hold the rotary cylinder pressed in to move to the
“Offs” line. The SYM and ASY fields are now replaced
by STO and CLR. With the STO button highlighted,
move the Ch 1 stick to the “forward” end-point and
press the rotary cylinder briefly: the value to the right of
“Offs” now changes from 0% to approx. +100% and the
graphic display of the mixer curve displayed on the right
also changes accordingly:
MIX 1
c1
c1
trv – 100% – 100%
offs + 100%
STO CLR
Return to the basic display by pressing ESC, then press
the rotary cylinder briefly to move to the …
»Servo display«
1
3
5
7
–100%
0
0%
0
0%
0
0%
(page 20)
2
4
6
8
0
0%
0
0%
0
0%
0
0%
… menu where you can immediately check the effect
of the settings you have entered so far: with the mixer
switched off, the bar display for Channel 1 follows the
movement of the Ch 1 stick. With the mixer switched on
it stops – as shown – at around -100%.
Note:
If you carry out this test with the receiving system
and power system switched on, please take great
care that you operate the change-over switch only
in the “motor OFF” position! If you ignore this, there
is a danger that the power system will be severely
overloaded by being switched on abruptly, and it
could even suffer damage. For the same reason
you should be careful only to use the change-over
switch at the “motor OFF” setting when you are flying the model.
To conclude the programming procedure, move the
selected “change-over switch” back to the “motor ON”
position, i. e. “forward”; move back to the multi-function
menu and from there to the …
»wing mixer«
(page 72 … 76)
… menu where you can – assuming that you have not
already done this in your general model programming –
select the “brake ¼ aile” line and set the desired aileron
travel when the Ch 1 stick is operated in the up direction
(“Brake”). In the
(switch) column press the rotary
cylinder briefly, then assign your selected “change-over
switch” by moving your preferred switch from “forward”
to “back”.
diff
ail
brak
brak
+ 33%
+ 50%
– 5%
+ 44%
aile.
rudd
elev
aile
3
SEL
If your model also features camber-changing flaps, and
you have therefore selected “2ail 2fl” in the “aile / flap”
line of the »base sett.« menu, locate the “change-over
switch” you have just operated (in this case switch 1),
move it “forward” again and switch to the “brak ¼ flap”
line with the rotary cylinder pressed in. You can now set
the desired down-deflection of the flaps when the Ch 1
stick is moved (this flap position is termed “crow” or “butterfly”; see also page 75), and assign the external switch
which also acts as the change-over switch, as already
described.
If you now switch back to the »Servo display« menu
and move the Ch 1 stick alone, you will see that the bar
display for Channel 1 either remains at around -100%
while the displays for channels 2 + 5 (and also the flaps
6 + 7, if set up) follow the stick movement, or the other
way round: when the switch is operated, the latter stay
at around the mid-point, and only the Channel 1 display
moves.
1
3
5
7
–100%
0
0%
89%
0
0%
2
4
6
8
+ 89%
0
0%
0
0%
0
0%
Programming example: fixed-wing model 103
104 For your notes
Operating the timers using the Ch 1 stick or a switch SW 1 … 7
If, following on from the model programming described
on the preceding pages, you have decided on Example
4, or you are using the Ch 1 stick (throttle / brake stick)
to control motor power – independently of this programming example – then you can use the associated control
switch to turn the stopwatch on and off automatically.
To assign this control switch, move the Ch 1 stick to the
Idle position, then move to the “clock” line in the …
»base sett.« menu.
motor on C1
tail type
aile / flap
clock
timer by pressing ESC, and then reset both timers to
their starting value by pressing CLEAR … or re-start
them by moving the stick beyond the switching point
again.
GRAUBELE
#01
9.6V
6:54h
0:55
stop
11:11
flt
«normal »
IFS
K78
the same switch to the “clocks”, with the same switching
direction, so that they start running at the same moment
as you turn the motor on.
In contrast, if you have decided on the solution described in Example 1, then unfortunately there is no alternative but to operate the motor and timers separately.
(pages 46 … 49)
no
normal
2aile
C2
0:00
SEL SEL
Select the switch symbol and press the rotary cylinder
briefly to activate the switch assignment. Now move the
throttle / brake stick from its idle position in the direction
of “full throttle”. After a short period the switch “C1l” or
“C2l” will appear on the screen as a switch at a particular position of the Ch 1 stick. If you now move the stick
back towards idle, you will see that the switch symbol
changes again at around 80% of stick travel: between
the “idle position” and the switching point the switch
symbol is “open”, beyond this it is “closed” (“Control
switches”: see page 33.)
If you now return to the transmitter’s basic display to
check the system, you will see that the stopwatch and
flight timer start running when you move the stick past
the switching point in the direction of full-throttle, and
that the stopwatch alone halts again when you move the
stick back to the idle position.
When the stopwatch is halted, you can stop the flight
Tip:
When using an electric motor the motor run is usually
limited by the capacity of the battery, and in this case
you would normally set the stopwatch to “count down”.
Simply enter the maximum permitted motor run in the
“clock” column, e. g. “5 min.”. As described on pages 48
and 53, the piezo buzzer starts to emit warning tones
“30 sec” before “zero”.
motor on C1
tail type
aile / flap
clock
no
normal
2aile
5:00
C2
SEL SEL
With the stopwatch halted, press the CLEAR button
in the basic display, so that the stopwatch switches to
the “Timer” function. The timer can now be started and
stopped using the throttle control.
Alternatively, if you control your motor using one of the
switches SW 1 … 4 or 6/7, as described in Examples 2
and 3, you do not need any of the previously described
control switches. All you need to do is locate the switch
which you use to turn your motor on and off, and assign
Programming example: fixed-wing model 105
Using flight phases
Within any of the twelve model memories you can
program up to three different flight phases (states of
flight), each incorporating settings which can be entirely
different from the others.
Each flight phase can be called up by means of a switch.
Flight phases represent the simplest and most convenient method of switching between different model settings in flight, and are programmed for different stages
of a typical flight, such as “normal”, “thermal”, “speed”,
“distance” etc..
We assume that you have already programmed the
model in the transmitter’s model memory, set it up carefully, test-flown it and trimmed it out properly. First move
to the …
Each of the two end-points of this switch should be
assigned to one flight phase, starting from the centre
position. We recommend that the switch direction should
match the phase numbering: as shown in the left-hand
illustration, for example, “phase 2” is “up” from the centre
position, while “phase 3” is “down” of it.
Select the appropriate line, name, and switch assignment in the “usual” way, i. e.. using the rotary cylinder.
»base sett.«
Note:
The names you assign to the various phases are of no
significance in programming terms – with the exception
of Phase 1, which is assigned the name “normal”, and is
always active when flight phases 2 and 3 are disabled.
clock
phase 2
phase 3
train. / stu.
(pages 46 … 49)
C2
0:00
takeoff
speed
1QR
SEL
… menu and then to the line “phase 2” and / or “phase
3”, where you can either accept the default name or
assign a specific, more appropriate name to each flight
phase. The purpose of this name is just to help you differentiate between the flight phases. It will later appear
in the transmitter’s basic screen display, and also in the
»phase trim« menu.
A physical switch must be assigned so that you can select the different flight phases. The ideal unit for switching up to three flight phases is the three-position switch
SW 6/7, located at front right on the transmitter; this is
perfect for switching between up to three flight phases.
106 Programming example: fixed-wing model
clock
phase 2
phase 3
train. / stu.
C2
0:00
takeoff 6
7
speed
1QR
SEL
For general model flying three flight phases are usually
quite sufficient:
• “Takeoff” or “thermal” for launch and “staying up”,
• “normal” for normal conditions, and
• “speed” for flying in “top gear”.
At this point all three phases have been set up and
assigned names; however … if you operate the phase
switch you will soon notice that nothing has changed,
i. e.. all the settings for the control surfaces, and especially the wing flaps, are the same.
To change these settings, call up the …
»phase trim« menu.
(page 70)
Move the phase switch (or switches) to the appropriate
position, and enter the desired values in the standard
way by turning and pressing the rotary cylinder, in a
similar way to the method of adjusting transmitter control
centres and offsets with other radio control systems.
P H A S E T R I M
normal
0%
0%
0%
¿ takeoff + 10% + 5% + 2%
speed – 7% – 5% – 1%
FLAP AILE ELEV
If you now switch the receiving system on (or move
to »Servo display«) and select the different phases
in turn, you will see a difference in control surface
response which is reflected in the bar display for the
servos.
Note:
Depending on the information you have entered in the
“aile / flap” line of the »base sett.« menu, the “ELEV”
column alone, the “AILE” and “ELEV” columns, or – as
shown above – “FLAP”, “AILE” and “ELEV” may appear
on the screen.
Programming example: servos running in parallel
In some cases a second servo is required to run in
parallel with an existing servo; for example, if a second
elevator or rudder is to be actuated by a separate servo,
or where a second servo is needed to cope with very
high control forces, or where two servos are required for
a large control surface due to the high forces involved.
This task could be solved simply by connecting both servos together in the model using a conventional Y-lead.
However, this has the drawback that the linked servos
cannot be adjusted individually from the transmitter, i. e..
you forfeit the basic advantage of the computer radio
control system: separate adjustment of individual servos
from the transmitter.
Another option would be to use a “magic box” module
(Order No. 3162 – available in the Graupner range) instead of a simple Y-lead. This unit allows one transmitter
channel to control up to four servos, which can then be
adjusted in direction of rotation, centre and travel; see
the Appendix for further details.
However, the simplest method is to use the transmitter’s
software facilities. For example, it is easy to set up …
Two elevator servos
… to operate in parallel. First move to the …
»base sett.«
(pages 46 … 49)
model name GRAUBELE
stick mode
1
motor on C1 no
tail type
2 elev sv
SEL
… menu and set “2 elev sv” in the “Tail” line.
The two elevator servos are then connected to receiver
output sockets 3 and 8.
Two rudder servos
In this example we will connect two rudders “in parallel”
using the »free mixer« menu. The second rudder could
be connected to receiver output 8, which is not already
in use.
The first step is to move to the …
»free mixer«
mixers, as the Ch 1 stick is (usually) at its top end-point
when the airbrakes are retracted, and the winglet rudders are only required to deflect outward proportionally
when the brakes are extended.
(pages 89 … 93)
rd
M1 tr
8
M2
?? ??
M3
?? ??
typ fro to
SEL SEL
… menu and set up a mixer “tr rd ¼ 8”. In the “Type”
column select the “tr” setting, so that the rudder trim
affects both rudder servos.
Finally switch to the graphics page and set a SYMmetrical mixer input of +100%:
MIX 1 tr rd
8
trv +100% +100%
offs + 0%
SYM ASY
Once again, for safety reasons it is really essential that
you set or leave input 8 to “empty” in the »contr set.«
menu.
As an added refinement, you may want both rudders
to deflect outwards only, as part of a braking system
controlled by the Ch 1 stick. This can be accomplished
by setting up two additional mixers “c1 ¼ 4” and “c1
¼ second rudder channel”, with suitable servo travel
settings. An offset of +100% is then selected for both
Programming example: fixed-wing model 107
Programming example: Delta / flying wing
On page 94, where the section on fixed-wing model
programming starts, you will find general notes regarding installing and setting up the RC system in a model,
and – of course – this applies equally to deltas and
flying wings. The information on test-flying and refining
the settings is also relevant, including the section on
programming flight phases.
left
Auxiliary function
Right flap
Left flap
Auxiliary function
Rudder (if present)
Right elevon (aile / elev) servo
Left elevon (aile / elev) servo
Airbrakes or throttle or speed
controller (electric motor)
Receiver power supply
If your delta or flying wing is of more “modern” configuration, the “normal” servo sequence has proved useful;
this arrangement can also be used for canards:
Auxiliary function
Right flap (/ elevator)
Left flap (/ elevator)
Right elevon (aileron / elevator)
Rudder (if present)
Elevator (if present)
Left elevon (aileron / elevator)
Airbrakes or throttle or speed
controller (electric motor)
Receiver power supply
right
In their characteristic shape and geometry, deltas and
flying wings differ very significantly from “normal” models
even at first sight, but the differences in the requisite
servo arrangement are rather more subtle. The “classic” model delta or flying wing generally has only two
control surfaces, which act both as ailerons (in opposite
directions) and as elevators (in the same direction), in a
similar way to the superimposed rudder / elevator functions of a V-tail. More modern designs tend to be more
complex; one (or two) inboard control surfaces may be
used purely as elevators, while the outboard ailerons
also act as elevators, but to a reduced extent. If a flying
wing has four or even six wing control surfaces, it is
certainly feasible nowadays to set them up with camberchanging flap functions and / or even a butterfly (crow)
system.
However, most of these models still rank as “classic” deltas and flying wings, and for them the servos should be
connected to the receiver as follows (see also page 38):
Depending on the receiver servo sequence you select,
you should first move to the ...
»base sett.«
(pages 46 … 49)
… menu and select the following options in each line:
„motor on C1“: • “no”:
The brake system is “retracted” at
the “forward” position of the throttle
/ brake stick, and the “Brake ¼
N.N.*” mixers in the »wing mixer«
menu are activated.
The warning message “Throttle too
high” (see page 18) is disabled.
*
108 Programming example: delta and flying wing
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
• “no/inv”:
The brake system is “retracted” at
the “back” position of the throttle
/ brake stick, and the “Brake ¼
N.N.*” mixers in the »wing mixer«
menu are activated.
The warning message “Throttle too
high” (see page 18) is disabled.
• “idle fr(ont)” or “idle re(ar)”:
The Ch 1 trim operates either
forward or back. If you switch the
transmitter on with the throttle stick
too far in the direction of full-throttle,
you will see the warning message
“Throttle too high” on the screen.
The “Brake ¼ N.N.*” mixers in the
»wing mixer« menu are disabled.
“tail type”:
“delt/FlW” or “normal” type
“aile/flap”:
Two ailerons “2 aile” and – if
present – two flaps “2ail 2fl”.
The primary function of these settings is to define the
range of wing mixers which the software will make
available. If you select the “delt/FlW” (Delta / flying wing)
tail type, the software automatically superimposes the
elevator and aileron functions. In this case the mixer
ratios can be adjusted by varying the Dual Rate settings
in the »D/R expo« menu (see page 66).
If you select “delt/FlW”, all settings of the “N.N.* ¼
elev” wing mixers in the ...
»wing mixer«
diff aile.
rudd
ail
brak
elev
diff–red
(pages 72 … 76)
+
+
+
+
0%
0%
0%
0%
same direction and provide an elevator effect when an
elevator command is given. The procedure starts by
selecting the …
digital trim of the elevator stick – so an alternative has to
be found.
Start by switching to the …
»wing mixer«
»contr set.«
diff aile.
diff. flaps
rudd
ail
flaps
ail
brak
elev
flap
brak
brak
aile
flap
elev
aile
elev
elev
flap
aile
flap
diff–red
SEL
… menu affect the elevator (up / down) function of the
two elevon (combined aileron / elevator) servos, as well
as the flap / elevator servos.
Notes:
• The flap mixers and flap differential only appear in
the list if you have also entered “2 fl” in the “aile / flap”
line at the “Delta / Flying wing” model type; see illustration on the right.
• In principle the same applies to the “Brake ¼ N.N.*”
mixers. These are also suppressed if you have decided on “Throttle min forward / back” in the “motor on
C1” line of the »base sett.« menu.
• Even if you have selected “2aile 2fl”, the (digital) elevator and aileron trims only affect aileron / elevator.
If you wish to circumvent this it is simpler to program
your model as described in the following section.
Programming a model delta using the “normal” tail
setting
Alternatively, if you select the “normal” tail type in the
»base sett.« menu, and connect the servos to the
receiver as shown in the lower of the two receiver socket
sequence diagrams on the previous page, then the
aileron function of the two elevon servos will work correctly, but not the elevator function.
In the “normal” tail type you have to force the two
aileron servos and the two flap servos to move in the
(pages 72 … 76)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0%
0%
0%
50%
0%
50%
66%
77%
77%
0%
0%
0%
SEL
… menu where you set values other than zero for the
fixed-wing mixers “Elevator ¼ N.N.*”.
(The following settings are model-specific, and you
must check carefully that they work correctly on
your model before accepting them.)
With this set-up the tailless model is considered to be
a “normal” four-flap wing (two ailerons and two flaps),
and therefore has all the options associated with this
wing type. The method involves the “Elevator ¼ N.N.*”
mixers, which were originally intended only for pitch trim
compensation and non-standard applications. In this
case they are “abused” by setting higher values than
normal, in order to transfer the elevator signal to the
control surfaces of the tailless model.
However, none of the fixed-wing mixers includes the
*
N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)
I5
I6
I7
(page 58)
ctrl6 + 15% + 15%
ctrl6 + 15% + 15%
empty + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
… menu and assign the same transmitter control to the
inputs 5 and (if required) 6, e. g. the INC / DEC buttons,
CTRL 6; this is used because its positions are stored
separately for each flight phase. Now move to the
“Travel” column and reduce the travel of the transmitter
control for these two inputs symmetrically to around
50%, or even less, because: the lower this value, the
finer the trim control.
However, if you prefer to use the normal elevator trim
lever, set the “Elevator ¼ N.N.*” mixers to 0%, and
instead set up free linear mixers to do the job.
This is done by calling up the ...
»free mixer«
(pages 89 … 93)
M1 tr
5
el
M2 tr
el
6
M3
?? ??
typ fro to
SEL SEL
… menu and setting up one linear mixer “tr el ¼ 5” (for
the simplest case), and possibly “tr el ¼ 6”. Move to
the graphic page of this menu to set the required mixer
ratios. Check the settings, and above all the direction of
Programming example: delta and flying wing 109
effect, in the »Servo display«, or on the model itself,
and change the prefixes if necessary.
If you carry out the programming as described above,
the ailerons will also move in the same direction, like
flaps, when you move the elevator stick. The effect of the
“tr” option is that the elevator trim lever also affects the
associated mixer when you operate the elevator stick.
Since an additional transmitter control is no longer
required for this arrangement, you should disable input 5
and (if used) input 6 in the second column of the »contr
set.« menu; simply set these inputs to “empty”.
Many years ago, when the mc-20 was the top-of-the-line
transmitter, the author flew a model delta programmed
exactly in this way, with the following additional refinements: “flap settings” used as trim, and butterfly (crow)
as landing aid – the latter exploiting the “brake ¼ aile”
and “brake ¼ flap” wing mixers to provide complete
compensation for pitch trim changes. In this case the
term “ailerons” means the outboard wing control surfaces, and “flap” the inboard pair of control surfaces.
A modern sweptback flying wing can be controlled in
a similar fashion. These models also feature inboard
and outboard control surfaces: the former forward of
the Centre of Gravity, the latter aft of it. Deflecting the
inboard control surface(s) down increases lift and produces an up-elevator effect. Deflecting them up creates
the opposite effect. In contrast, the outboard ailerons act
in the reverse direction: a down-deflection produces a
down-elevator effect, and vice versa. In this case there
are really no limits to what you can achieve with careful
thought and the sophisticated mixers of the mx-16iFS.
However, please note that you should be extremely
careful when setting differential travel with such a
configuration, regardless of the type of servo arrange110 Programming example: delta and flying wing
ment you have selected. This is because differential
travels tend to produce an asymmetrical elevator effect
on a tailless model, rather than the desired adverse yaw
reduction. For this reason it is advisable to start with a
differential setting of 0%, at least for the first few flights.
When you are familiar with the model and feel the need
to experiment, it may then be feasible under certain
circumstances to try differential settings deviating from
zero.
For larger models it could be advisable to install winglets
fitted with rudders, i. e. small vertical surfaces at the
wingtips. If these are actuated by two separate servos,
they can be controlled as described in the example on
page 107 dealing with “Servos running in parallel”.
You may also want both rudders to deflect outwards
when a braking system is operated using the Ch 1 stick,
and this can be accomplished as follows: if you have
selected the “normal” tail type, set up two further mixers
“c1 ¼ 4” and “c1 ¼ second rudder control channel” with suitable travel settings. The offset should be
+100%, as the Ch 1 stick is usually at the forward endpoint when the airbrakes are retracted, and the winglet
rudders are required to deflect outwards proportionally
when the brakes are extended.
For your notes 111
Programming example: F3A model aircraft
F3A models belong to the category of powered fixedwing model aircraft designed for competition flying. They
may be powered by an internal combustion engine or an
electric motor. Electric-powered models are eligible to fly
in the international F3A “pattern” class, and also in the
F5A electric aerobatic class.
In this programming example we assume that you have
already read through the description of the individual
menus, and are therefore familiar with the general
method of handling the transmitter.
On page 94, where the section on fixed-wing model
programming starts, you will find general notes on
installing and setting up the RC system in a model, and
– of course – this applies equally to F3A models, and
therefore does not need to be repeated at this point.
If an F3A model is accurately built, it usually exhibits flying characteristics which are almost completely neutral.
The perfect aerobatic model has a very smooth but precise control response, and any movement around any
one of its flight axes should not affect the other axes.
F3A models are flown using aileron, elevator and rudder
controls. The use of separate servos for each aileron is
almost universal. The flying controls are supplemented
by control of motor power (throttle function) and in many
cases a retractable undercarriage. As a result the servo
assignment for channels 1 to 5 is no different to the
112 Programming example: F3A model
fixed-wing models we have already described.
The auxiliary function “Retracts” is usually assigned to
one of the auxiliary channels 6 to 8. Ideally the retracts
are operated using a switch without a centre detent, or
the momentary button SW 4. An optional “extra” – used
only if necessary – is mixture adjustment control for the
carburettor. This is generally operated by one of the two
INC / DEC buttons (CTRL 5 or 6) on the transmitter,
connected to one of the auxiliary channels not already
in use.
Auxiliary function
Mixture adjustment
Retracts
Right aileron
Rudder
Elevator
Aileron or left aileron
Throttle or speed controller
(electric motor)
Receiver power supply
When assigning functions to the auxiliary channels at
the transmitter, it is advisable to ensure that the controls
required are within easy reach, since the advanced
aerobatic pilot has very little time to think about letting
go of the sticks – especially when flying under competition conditions.
Programming
The basic programming of the transmitter has already
been described in detail in the section starting on page
96, so this section concentrates on tips specific to F3A
models.
In the …
»servo set.«
S1
S2
S3
(page 56)
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
trav +
rev cent
SYM ASY
SEL SEL
… menu you can adjust the servo settings to suit your
model.
It has proved advisable to use at least 100% servo
travel, as precision of control can be perceptibly better if
relatively large servo travels are employed. This should
be borne in mind when building the model and designing the control surface linkages. Any minor corrections
required can be made in the third column during the
initial test flights.
The next step is to select the ...
»base sett.«
(pages 46 … 49)
… menu and activate the idle trim for Channel 1 (normally “idle re(ar)”; i. e. full-throttle forward). The digital
trim now works at the idle end of stick travel. The “cut-off
trim” enables you to switch immediately from the “motor
stopped” position to the idle position you have previously
established just by applying a single “click” on the trim
lever (see page 34).
model name EXTRA
stick mode
1
motor on C1 idle re
tail type
normal
SEL
The remaining settings should be adjusted if required to
suit your personal preferences.
You may find it necessary to assign transmitter controls
to particular inputs to operate the retractable undercarriage and carburettor mixture adjustment. This is carried
out in the...
»contr set.« menu.
(page 58)
For example, you may like to assign a particular transmitter control – perhaps one of the ON / OFF switches
SW 1 … 4 – to the input “I8” for the retracts, and a
proportional control – e. g. the INC / DEC button CTRL
6 – to the input “I7”, for mixture adjustment:
I6
I7
I8
empty + 100% + 100%
ctrl6 + 100% + 100%
+ 100% + 100%
2
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
The retracts are extended and retracted when you operate the switch “SW 2”. You may need to adjust the travel
of the transmitter control, and perhaps reverse that
channel by setting a negative prefix for servo travel.
F3A models fly fairly fast, and respond very “solidly” to
corrective movements of the servos. However, in competition flying it is vital that all abrupt control movements
and corrections should be kept to a minimum, as the
judges will invariably notice any lack of smoothness and
dock a few points, so it is advisable to set exponential
control characteristics on the stick functions.
Move to the ...
»D/R Expo« menu.
(page 66)
Exponential values of around +30% on aileron, elevator
and rudder have proved to be a good starting point, and
you can set them in the right-hand column of this menu.
These values provide smooth, well-defined control of
the typical F3A model. Many experts use higher values;
even up to +60% exponential.
aile 100% + 33%
elev 100% + 33%
rudd 100% + 33%
DUAL EXPO
SEL
SEL
Since F3A models generally have two aileron servos, it
has proved useful to deflect both ailerons slightly “up” for
the landing. In most cases this causes the model to fly a
little more slowly and with a more stable attitude on the
landing approach.
To achieve this you will need to program mixers in the ...
»free mixer« menu.
(section starting on page 89)
Both ailerons are usually required to deflect “up” as a
landing aid, in parallel with the movement of the throttle
stick, but only from the half-throttle setting in the direction of idle. From that point on, the further the stick is
moved towards the idle position, the more the ailerons
deflect up. The reverse occurs when you open the
throttle: the ailerons are returned to neutral to avoid the
model suddenly ballooning up.
A little down-elevator must usually be mixed in to ensure
that the aeroplane does not climb when the ailerons /
flaps are extended.
To meet these requirements you need the two mixers
shown in the illustration below.
c1
M1 Tr
5
M2 Tr
c1
el
M3
?? ??
typ fro to
SEL SEL
3I
3I
The mixers are activated using one and the same
external switch, e. g. switch No. “3”, which therefore has
to be assigned to both mixers, with the same direction
of effect.
using the rotary cylinder, press ENTER
Move to
or the rotary cylinder to move to the mixer inputs on
the second screen page, and set the appropriate mixer
ratios. In both cases the mixer neutral point should be
left at the centre position of the Ch 1 stick travel.
For this reason you should now select the ASY field,
move the Ch 1 stick to the Idle range, and enter the
following values:
MIX 1: -60% … -80% and
MIX 2:
-5% … -10%.
Example of MIX 1:
MIX 1
c1
5
trv – 66% + 0%
offs
0%
SYM ASY
This completes the basic set-up for a typical F3A model.
Correcting model-specific errors
It is an unfortunate fact of life that even very carefully
built models exhibit minute faults and inaccuracies which
produce unwanted deviations when the model is flying;
Programming example: F3A model 113
the mixers of a computer radio control system are then
required to compensate for these deficiencies. In this
section we will describe how to carry out the adjustments required, but please note the following points
before we get started: it is vital to ensure that the model
is built as accurately as humanly possible, is balanced
perfectly around the lateral and longitudinal axes, and
that motor downthrust and sidethrust are set correctly.
1. Rudder causes unwanted movement around the
longitudinal and lateral axes
It is often the case that a rudder command causes the model to rotate slightly around the longitudinal and / or lateral axis. This is particularly troublesome in what is known as knife-edge flight, where the
model’s total lift is generated by the fuselage, aided
by the rudder deflection. The result is that the model rotates and changes heading slightly, as if the pilot were applying aileron or elevator at the same time.
These tendencies have to be corrected with compensation around the lateral axis (elevator) and around
the longitudinal axis (aileron).
These corrections can be achieved easily with the
mx-16iFS, exploiting the »free mixer« once again.
For example, if the model rotates to the right around
the longitudinal (roll) axis when the rudder is deflected to the right for a knife-edge pass, then a mixer is
set up which deflects the ailerons slightly to the left.
Heading changes around the lateral (elevator) axis
can be corrected in a similar way using a mixer acting upon the elevator:
a) Correction around the lateral axis (elevator)
MIX “rd ¼ el”
ASYmmetrical setting. The exact values required
must be found by flight testing.
114 Programming example: F3A model
b) Correction around the longitudinal axis (aileron)
MIX “rd ¼ ar”
ASYmmetrical setting. The exact values required
must be found by flight testing.
In most cases relatively small mixer values are called
for – typically below 10% – but this does vary from
model to model.
2. Vertical climb and descent
Many models exhibit a tendency to deviate from the
ideal line in vertical climbs and descents. To correct
this we need an elevator neutral position which varies
according to the throttle setting. For example, if the
model tends to pull out of a vertical descent by itself
when the motor is throttled back, slight down-elevator
must be mixed in at this throttle setting.
MIX “c1 ¼ el”
As a rule you will need to set mixer values below 5%,
but once again there is no substitute for test-flying.
3. Rolling (movement around the longitudinal axis)
at idle
When you reduce the throttle setting, the model may
tend to roll slightly in one direction. Clearly an aileron correction must be made. However, it is much
more elegant to let a mixer correct this effect for you
than to move the stick manually. Once again, a mixer
needs to be set up:
MIX “c1 ¼ ar”
As a rule you will need to set mixer values below 5%,
but once again test-flying is called for.
The adjustment process should only be carried out
in calm weather. Often all you need to do is apply the
mixer in the control segment between half-throttle
and idle. To achieve this, leave the Offset point at the
centre position, and set up the mixer ASYmetrically.
4. Rolling when ailerons and flaps are extended
If you fly the landing approach with both ailerons deflected up, the model may show a tendency to roll
slightly due to minor variations in aileron servo travel (or constructional inaccuracies); i. e. the model may
turn to either side by itself. Once again, this tendency can easily be corrected using a mixer to vary the
compensation according to the position of the ailerons / landing flaps.
MIX “c1 ¼ ar”
It is essential to provide a means of switching the
mixer on and off using the switch which controls the
aileron / landing flap function (see previous page), to
ensure that this mixer only has any effect when the
aileron / landing flap function is activated. The optimum value has to be found by test-flying.
And finally a few words on the …
“FAIL-SAFE settings”
We strongly recommend that you make use of the safety
potential of this option by at least setting the throttle
position (glow-powered models) to idle, or the electric
motor to stop, if a fail-safe event should be triggered.
This simple precaution ensures that the model is much
less likely to cause havoc and cause property damage
or personal injury.
In the receiver’s default state the servos remain in their
last valid position (“hold mode”) when interference
occurs. However, you can program any individual servo
output of your receiver to either “fail-safe position” or
“hold”, as described on page 28 and in the instructions
supplied with the receiver. You can also define the length
of time ( 1 … max. 5 seconds) after which the fail-safe
function takes effect.
Summary
The settings described on this page are intended primarily for the expert flyer. Please bear in mind that refining
the flying characteristics of a model to this extent involves tremendous effort, time, sensitivity and expertise.
Some experts continue the programming procedure
even when they are flying. It is not advisable to try this
if you are just a moderately advanced pilot making your
first attempt with an F3A aerobatic model. You would be
well advised to request help from an experienced pilot,
and carry out the fine-tuning adjustments mentioned
here one by one, with the expert at your side, until your
model exhibits the neutral flying characteristics you
desire.
Programming example: F3A model 115
Programming example: model helicopter
In this programming example we assume that you
have already read and understood the descriptions of
the individual menus, and are by now familiar with the
general handling of the transmitter. We also assume that
you have assembled and adjusted the helicopter exactly
according to the kit instructions. The electronic facilities
provided by the transmitter should never be used to
compensate for major mechanical inaccuracies.
As so often in life, there are various ways and means of
reaching a particular destination when programming the
mx-16iFS. In this example our intention is to provide a
sensibly structured course of action, so that you have
a clear idea of logical programming techniques. Where
there are several possible methods, we first describe the
simplest and most easily understood solution. It is likely
that the helicopter will work perfectly when set up in this
way, but naturally you are still free to try out other solutions at a later stage, in case they suit you better.
We have deliberately chosen this simple programming
project in order to demonstrate that it is possible to set
up a helicopter which flies extremely well with relatively
little programming effort.
Nevertheless, we do not want to forfeit all the possible
refinement facilities: after the basic description you will
also find set-up notes on gyro gain, speed governors
and flight phase programming.
Note:
If, in contrast to the glow-powered machine described
here, your main interest lies in electric-powered model
helicopters, then please read on! Apart from the idle
adjustments, which naturally do not apply, you can adopt
most of the settings described in the following section
virtually unchanged.
To initiate this typical programming exercise move to the
»mod. mem.« menu, then to the …
“select model”
(page 44)
… sub-menu, where you select a free model memory
using the rotary cylinder:
As our programming example we take the GRAUPNER
STARLET 50 helicopter, with right-hand rotation, three
swashplate linkage points distributed evenly at 120°
(“3sv (2 roll)” type), a beginner’s set-up without enhanced throttle curve, without heading-lock gyro system,
no method of influencing the gyro’s “normal operating
mode” from the transmitter, and with no speed governor
(regulator).
116 Programming example: model helicopter
01
02
03
04
05
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
¿¿empty¿
After a brief press of the rotary cylinder or pressing
ENTER, you can use the rotary cylinder to select …
Sel model type
( empty mod mem )
… the model type “Helicopter”. Confirm your choice
with a brief press on the rotary cylinder, or by pressing
ENTER, and the screen immediately switches to the
basic display.
Notes:
• Once you have called up the “Model select” option it
is not possible to interrupt the process, i. e. you must
choose one or other model type. Even if you switch
the transmitter off, then on again, you still have to
make this choice. However, if you make a mistake
you can always correct it simply by erasing the model memory.
• If the warning message “Throttle too high” appears,
you can erase it by turning the rotary proportional
knob CTRL 7 anti-clockwise to its end-point.
• If the battery voltage is too low, you will not be able
to change model memories for safety reasons. In this
case the screen displays an appropriate message:
not possible now
vo l t a g e t o o l o w
The memory should now be assigned an appropriate
name, which is entered in the …
»base sett.«
model name
stick mode
swashplate
rotor direct
(pages 50 … 54)
1
1 servo
left
… menu using the characters which are available in the
“model name” line of the second menu page:
0123456789 : ;
?
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
In the second line – “Rotor direct(ion)” – we enter the
direction of rotation of the main rotor as viewed from
above. In the “(Collective) pitch min.” line set “front”
or “rear” to suit your personal preference. This setting applies equally to all subsequent mixers, and it is
therefore vital that you do not change it later in order to
alter individual mixer directions, such as the direction of
collective pitch or throttle.
At this point, if you have not already done so, the servos
should be connected to the receiver in the following
sequence:
Auxiliary function (speed governor)
Gyro gain
Throttle servo (speed controller)
Free or auxiliary function
Tail rotor servo (gyro system)
Pitch-axis servo
Roll 1 servo
Roll 2 servo
Receiver power supply
model name STAR
Once you have entered the “Model name” you should
check that the “Stick mode” is correct:
model name STARLET
1
stick mode
swashplate
1 servo
rotor direct
left
SEL
In the next three lines we come to the first settings which
are specific to helicopters:
stick mode
swashplate
rotor direct
pitch min
1
3sv(2roll)
right
front
SEL
In the “swashplate (type)” line select the number of
servos which are used to actuate the swashplate.
The mixer ratios and mixer directions for the swashplate
servos for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis are set in
the …
»swashp.mix« menu.
S P
ptch
roll
nick
–
(page 93)
M I X E
+
+
+
R
61%
61%
61%
SEL
You will find that they are pre-set to +61% in each case.
If the swashplate does not respond correctly to the stick
movements, the first step is to change the mixer directions from “+” to “-” if necessary. The second recourse is
to reverse the servo directions in the »servo set.« menu.
Note:
Compared with earlier systems, please note that the first
collective pitch servo and the throttle servo have been
interchanged in later GRAUPNER mc and mx radio
control systems.
Now move to the …
»servo set.«
S1
S2
S3
(page 56)
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
0% 100% 100%
trav +
rev cent
SYM ASY
SEL SEL
… menu, where you can set up the travels and directions of rotation of the individual servos. The basic aim
here should be to keep servo travels at ±100% wherever
possible, as this maintains best possible resolution and
accuracy. Use “rev” if necessary to change the direction of rotation of any servo; do check carefully that the
direction you set really is correct. The tail rotor servo,
in particular, must operate in such a way that the nose
(!) of the helicopter moves in the same direction as the
movement of the tail rotor stick.
A glance at the …
»contr set.«
(page 60)
gyr empty + 111% + 88%
I8
empty + 100% + 100%
lim ctrl7 + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
… menu will show you that transmitter control “7”, i. e.
Programming example: model helicopter 117
the rotary proportional control CTRL 7, is assigned to
the “lim” input, whereas all other inputs are programmed
to “empty” by default. The “lim” input serves as throttle
limiter. It acts solely on output “6”, to which the throttle
servo is connected.
Just to remind you:
• The throttle limiter does not control the throttle servo;
it simply limits the travel of this servo in the forward
direction, according to the setting of the throttle limiter. The throttle servo is usually controlled by the collective pitch stick via the throttle curve or curves you
have set in the »heli mixer« menu, for which reason
input 6 should always be left “empty”. For more details please refer to the sections on pages 62 and 63
of the manual.
• Moreover the Ch 1 trim only affects a helicopter’s
throttle servo. This section does not describe the special features of this trim (“cut-off trim”) again, as it
is covered on page 34. (Thanks to the digital trims,
trim values are automatically stored when you switch
models and when you switch between flight phases.)
• You will find a detailed description of the basic idle
set-up procedure and the method of adjusting idle
and throttle limit in the section starting on page 62.
Now select the ASY field in the “Travel” column, and
increase the value in the highlighted field from +100% to
+125%, with the throttle limiter at its forward end-stop:
gyr empty + 111% + 88%
empty + 100% + 100%
I8
lim ctrl7 + 100% + 125%
tr v +
ASY
SYM
SEL
This ensures that the throttle limiter cannot possibly
118 Programming example: model helicopter
restrict the full throttle travel dictated by the collective
pitch stick when the model is in flight.
Set-up note for electric helicopters:
Since electric motors by their nature require no idle
setting, the only important point when setting up an
electric-powered model helicopter is that the adjustment
range of the throttle limiter should be set significantly
higher and lower than the adjustment range of the
speed controller. It may therefore be necessary to set
the “Travel” value of the throttle limiter to an appropriate
point in the “Lim” line of the »contr set.« menu, such
as 110%, symmetrical. However, further fine-tuning can
be carried out exactly as described here for the glowpowered machine.
An additional function needs to be activated in the …
»base sett.« menu.
(pages 50 … 54)
Even if you are a beginner to flying and are not yet
ready for this, it is advisable at least to define the autorotation switch, so that you have an “emergency cut”
switch for the motor. This is carried out by selecting the
“Auto-rotation” line with the rotary cylinder pressed in,
and then moving one of the ON / OFF switches (SW 1
… 4) to the “ON” setting. On the right of the screen the
switch number (in our example “1”) appears:
pitch min
clock
phase 2
autorotat.
front
10:01
C3
Schwebe
hover
1
SEL
This switch should be located at a position on the transmitter where you can easily reach it without letting go of
the stick, e. g. above the collective pitch stick.
Note:
For more information on setting up this “emergency OFF
switch” please refer to the section in the centre column
of the following page.
And another tip:
Please make it a habit to give all the switches a common
“on” direction; then a quick glance at the transmitter
before flying will soon reassure you that all switches are
“off”.
If you wish, you could at this point move to the line
above and assign a flight phase switch for flight phase
2, which is already assigned the name “hover”, but this
simple programming example deliberately excludes
such refinements.
You have now completed the basic settings at the transmitter, i. e. the procedure which you will need to use time
and again when setting up new models.
The actual helicopter-specific set-up is carried out
primarily in the …
»heli mixer« menu.
ptch
ch1
thro
tail
ch1
gyro
inp8
normal
(pages 78 … 87)
0%
0%
SEL
In the very first line you will see the “ptch” function, and
pressing ENTER or the rotary cylinder takes you to
the appropriate sub-menu. At this point you will see a
graphic representation of the collective pitch curve. This
is initially defined by only three reference points, and in
most cases this is quite adequate.
Tip:
Always try to manage with these three reference points
initially, as additional points just complicate matters,
and extra complexity is just what you don’t need at the
moment.
The reference point for hovering should generally be the
mechanical centre-point of the collective pitch stick, as
this position feels completely natural to most pilots. You
can, of course, set up the curve to locate the hover at a
different point, but you should not be tempted to do this
unless you know exactly what you are doing. Start by
setting the collective pitch stick to centre. Assuming that
you previously adjusted the servos in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions, the servo output arms
will now (usually) be at right-angles to the servo case.
If you have not already done so, adjust the mechanical linkages to the rotor head so that all the blades are
set to a collective pitch angle of 4° to 5° positive for the
hover. All known helicopters will fly at this approximate
setting.
Now push the collective pitch stick fully forward to the
maximum collective pitch point (the full-length vertical
line indicates the current position of the stick.) Adjust
Point 5 on the collective pitch curve using the rotary
cylinder, with the aim of producing a maximum collective
pitch setting of around 9° at the main rotor blades. This
point should be at a value of around +50%.
Note:
A rotor blade set-up gauge, e. g. the GRAUPNER item,
Order No. 61, is very useful when setting up blade pitch
angles, as you can read off the angles directly.
Now pull the collective pitch stick right back to the collective pitch minimum position. Set the blade pitch angle
for Point 1 to 0 to -4°, depending on your piloting ability.
This produces a slightly angled line at the hover point,
forming what is known as the collective pitch curve. It
might look approximately like this:
ptch
+100%
input
+ 80%
output
point 5 + 80%
If you now switch to the auto-rotation phase – you will
see the name of the flight phase “Autorot” at the bottom
of the screen – the “old” collective pitch curve will re-appear. In this phase you should set the same values as in
the normal phase, with the following exception: increase
the pitch angle at Point 5 (collective pitch maximum) by
about 2°. This gives slightly more pitch for flaring the
model when practising “autos” at a later (!) date.
Once you have set up the collective pitch curve, operate
the auto-rotation switch again, then press ESC to return
to the helicopter mixer menu select point. Now we move
on to the “ch1 ¼ throttle” line, where you can set up the
throttle curve.
The first step here is to enter the idle trim range by
adjusting the throttle curve. Move the collective pitch
stick to the minimum position, and set Point 1 to a value
of around 65%.
ch1
thro
100%
input
65%
output
point 3
65%
With the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully
open, pull the collective pitch stick to the “fully back”
position and move it slightly to and fro: the throttle servo
should not respond to this movement. This arrangement
gives you a seamless transition from idle trim to the
throttle curve. You will probably need to make further adjustments to the throttle curve, but this must be carried
out later as part of the flight-testing process.
If you now switch temporarily from this graph to the
auto-rotation flight phase, you will see – instead of the
usual display – the following:
ch1
thro
off
Autorot
This means that the throttle servo has switched to a
fixed value, which can be adjusted as follows:
Press ESC to return to the menu list. Assuming that you
are still in the auto-rotation phase, this will now include
new sub-menus.
The important line is “Throttle”, where you should set
a value of around +125% or -125%, depending on the
direction of servo rotation.
ptch
thro
tail
gyro
Autorot
125%
0%
0%
SEL
This setting ensures that the motor stops reliably in
the auto-rotation phase (to allow you to cope with an
emergency). Later, when you have gained sufficient
experience to practise auto-rotation landings, the setting
Programming example: model helicopter 119
should be changed to a value which provides a reliable
idle.
Set-up note for electric helicopters:
Since the motor must be stopped completely if an emergency occurs with an electric-powered model helicopter,
this setting can be adopted unchanged.
At present the remaining sub-menus are of no interest.
Simply switch “Auto-rotation” off, and move back to the
first menu list.
Call up the set-up page of the “ch1 ¼ tail (rotor)” menu:
this is where you set static torque compensation (DMA)
for the tail rotor. Once again, please restrict yourself
to the three default reference points; everything else
is the preserve of the experienced pilot. For the initial
set-up – intended for a heading-lock gyro system – the
uniform pre-set values of 0% should be changed to
-30% at Point 1 (collective pitch minimum) and +30%
at the opposite end, Point 5 (collective pitch maximum),
although you may find it necessary to adjust the settings
slightly later:
tail
ch1
0%
input
0%
output
0%
point 3
normal
Now switch back to the auto-rotation phase for a moment. The set-up curve is disabled here, with the result
that the tail rotor servo no longer responds to collective
pitch commands (when the main rotor is not powered,
there is no torque to be corrected).
The – static – pre-set of the gyro effect principle (“normal” or “heading lock” mode), and also the gyro gain can
120 Programming example: model helicopter
now be altered by setting a value other than “0” in the
“Gyro” line:
ptch
ch1
thro
tail
ch1
gyro
inp8
normal
0%
0%
SEL
Please be sure to read and observe the set-up instructions supplied with your gyro at this point, otherwise
there is always a possibility that your helicopter will be
uncontrollable!
If your gyro features gain control from the transmitter
– unlike the model we are using in this example – you
will need another free proportional control for it, e. g. the
INC / DEC button CTRL 5. This can be assigned to the
“Gyro” input in the …
»contr set.« menu.
(page 60)
I5
empty + 100% + 100%
thr empty + 100% + 100%
gyr ctrl5 + 100% + 100%
tr v +
SEL
SYM
ASY
Hold the button pressed forward; the beep sound will
rise steadily. When it falls silent, move to the ASY field in
the “Travel” column using the rotary cylinder. Press the
rotary cylinder, and you will be able to set a maximum
gyro gain such as 50% in the now highlighted field; this
represents a safe fixed value which is maintained as
long as the button is at its forward end-stop. You will
probably need to adjust the value in the course of flighttesting.
Additional notes on setting up gyros can be found on
page 81.
Further adjustments
If you have followed this programming example, you will
have a helicopter which is set up properly, and in an
ideal state for hovering practice and simple circuits. Of
course, you may wish to activate further functions depending on your skill and flying experience. If you wish
to fly using different rotor speeds and trim set-ups, you
will need to activate a series of “flight phases”, which
can be called up via switches which you assign. The first
step in this process is to call up the …
»base sett.«
pitch min
clock
phase 2
autorotat.
(page 50 … 54)
front
G3
0:00
2
hover
3
SEL
… menu, assign a switch to “Phase 2”, e. g. SW 2, and
enter a relevant name (if you wish).
It is important to be quite clear in your mind that autorotation always has absolute priority over any other
phases. This simply means: if you operate the auto-rotation switch, you immediately move to the auto-rotation
phase from either of the other two flight phases (“normal” phase and “phase 2”).
Now move back to the »heli mixer« menu, switch to
“Phase 2” (which you have just set up), and modify the
settings accordingly. Since the mx-16iFS features digital
trims, in the Heli program all the trim positions for the
control functions “roll”, “pitch-axis” and “tail rotor” are
stored separately for each flight phase, in addition to the
other menu settings which you entered separately for
each flight phase (see page 78).
For example, if the motor run is limited by the fueltank
size or battery capacity, you should set the stopwatch
to count down. Enter the maximum possible motor run
time, e. g. “5 min.”. The transmitter’s piezo buzzer now
starts emitting warning sounds starting at “30 s” before
“zero”, as described on page 53. You could assign the
transmitter control switch “C3” to this timer, by first
activating switch assignment and then turning the throttle limit control from its idle position in the direction of
full-throttle:
pitch min
clock
phase 2
autorotat.
front
5:00
C3
2
hover
3
SEL
With the stopwatch halted, press the CLEAR button
at the basic display, so that the stopwatch switches to
“Timer” function. The timer then starts automatically
when you move the throttle limit slider towards fullthrottle, and stops again when you move the limiter back
to the idle range.
ter is to install and program the speed governor exactly
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Of course, the mx-16iFS provides further facilities to
allow you to implement different rotational speeds in the
individual flight phases. A practical suggestion, which
includes the throttle limiter function, can be found in the
section starting on page 81.
If you have set up your helicopter as described in this
programming example, you will find that it is capable
of carrying out extremely challenging flight tasks even
though it is not suitable for competition work.
We suggest that you should not make use of additional
functions until your model is flying perfectly, so that you
will be in a position to recognise and appreciate any
improvements. Whenever possible, it is always best to
implement additional refinements one at a time, otherwise you won’t know which change has brought about
any improvement. Bear in mind that the good pilot is
not recognised by the number of complex functions with
which he can cope, but by the results he can obtain
when flying a relatively simple set-up.
Suggested refinement: speed governor
At some time you may wish to install a speed governor
(regulator) in your helicopter, e. g. the mc-Heli-Control,
to try flying with a system rotational speed which is
automatically maintained at a constant value. It makes
sense to couple the individual rotor speeds with the
flight phases, as this enables you to carry out further
fine-tuning.
The basic requirement when programming the transmitProgramming example: model helicopter 121
Trainer system
Total control transfer
mx-16iFS as Pupil transmitter
The model to be controlled by the pupil MUST be programmed completely in a model memory of the Teacher
transmitter, i. e. with all its functions including trims and
any mixer functions, and the iFS receiver of the model
must be “bound” to the Teacher transmitter. In principle,
however, an mx-16iFS Pupil transmitter can also be
linked to a Teacher transmitter operating on the “classic”
35 / 40 MHz band, since the PPM signal required for this
is present at the DSC socket of the mx-16iFS.
The control functions of the Pupil transmitter must act
directly on the control channels, i. e. the receiver outputs,
without the intervention of any mixers. To accomplish
this it is best to set up a free model memory in the Pupil
transmitter with the required model type (“Fixed-wing” or
“Helicopter”). Assign the model name “PUPIL”, and set
up the stick mode (Mode 1 … 4) and “Idle / collective
pitch forward / back” to suit the pupil’s preference. All the
other settings should be left at the appropriate default
values. If you select the “Helicopter” model type, the idle
trim must also be set accordingly on the Pupil transmitter. All other functions are carried out by the Teacher
transmitter.
Important:
ALWAYS leave the On / Off switch on the Pupil
transmitter at the “OFF” position, as this is the only
way to ensure that an RF signal is not radiated by
the transmitter module, even when the DSC lead is
plugged in. At the transmitter’s basic display the
message “DSC” will appear to the left of “iFS”.
122 Trainer system
GRAUBELE
#01
10.5V
1:11h
0:00
stop
0:00
flt
«normal »
DSC IFS
The two transmitters should now be inter-connected
using the appropriate Trainer lead: see the picture on the
left of the next double page.
When assigning the control functions the usual conventions should be observed:
Channel
Function
1
Throttle / Collective pitch
2
Aileron / Roll
3
Elevator / Pitch-axis
4
Rudder / Tail rotor
mx-16iFS as Teacher transmitter (total control
transfer)
The model to be controlled by the pupil MUST be
programmed COMPLETELY in a model memory of the
mx-16iFS Teacher transmitter, i. e. with all its functions
including trims and any mixer functions, and the iFS
receiver must be “bound” to the Teacher transmitter.
The two transmitters should now be inter-connected
using the appropriate Trainer lead: see the diagram on
the right-hand page; note that the Teacher transmitter
MUST always be switched on before the Trainer lead is
connected.
Total control transfer is the only option when using the
mx-16iFS transmitter with a Pupil transmitter.
The mx-16iFS Teacher transmitter can also be linked to
any suitable Pupil transmitter, even those operating on
the “classic” 35 / 40 MHz band; see right-hand picture
on the next double page. For example, an mx-16iFS
Teacher transmitter can also be connected to an mx16s Pupil transmitter. In such cases the basic requirement for a correct link with a Pupil transmitter is
that PPM modulation is ALWAYS set on the Pupil
transmitter, regardless of the modulation used by
the Teacher transmitter.
If you are using a Trainer lead with the Order No. 3290.7
or 3290.8, connect the plug marked “M” (“Master”) to the
socket on the Teacher transmitter, and the plug marked
“S” (“Student” or “Slave”) to the Pupil transmitter’s
socket. Both transmitters must be prepared as described
in the operating instructions supplied with them.
Select the “Trainer” line in the »base sett.« menu, and
assign a Trainer change-over switch. Ideally this should
be the momentary button SW 4 / PB 8, assigned as
“push-button 8” (see page 33), so that the flight tutor can
instantly resume control from the Teacher transmitter at
any time.
clock
phase 2
phase 3
train./stu.
C2
0:00
takeoff 7
6
speed
1QR
8
SEL
As long as this button is held pressed in, the system is
in Pupil mode. As soon as the button is released, the
Teacher transmitter resumes full control.
The basic display of the mx-16iFS Teacher transmitter
does not change when Pupil mode is selected.
Checking the functions
Operate the assigned Trainer change-over switch:
• The Pupil system is working properly if no error
message appears in the basic display of the Teacher
transmitter when you operate the assigned changeover switch.
• However, if the basic display shows the message
no
student
signal
,
then there is a problem with the connection; at the
same time you will hear a warning signal. In this
case all the functions remain under the control of the
Teacher transmitter, regardless of the position of the
Trainer change-over switch. This ensures that the
model is not uncontrollable at any time.
Important note:
It is absolutely essential to check that all functions can
be transferred correctly BEFORE you start using a
Trainer mode system.
Possible errors
• The iFS receiver is not bound to the Teacher transmitter.
• The interface in the Pupil transmitter, which replaces
the RF module, is not connected correctly.
• The Pupil transmitter is not ready for use.
• The Pupil transmitter is not set to PPM mode.
• The Trainer lead is not properly connected.
Trainer system 123
Appendix
Trainer mode operations with the mx-16iFS transmitter
Due to the steadily growing product range please refer to www.graupner.com for the latest information.
mx-16iFS Teacher transmitter
ransmitter
mx-16iFS Pupil transmitter
nsmitter
Trainer lead,
Order No. 4179.1
Trainer lead,
Order No. 3290.8
Trainer lead,
Order No. 4179.1
M
Teacher transmitter
with DSC socket
Teacher transmitter with Teacher
module, Order No. 3290.2,
3290.19, 3290.22
mx-12(s), mx-16s + iFS, mx22(iFS), mx-24s and – if fitted
mc-19 to mc-24, mx-22(iFS),
mx-24s
with the DSC socket, Order No.
3290.24 – mc-19(s), mc-22(s)
and mc-24
Trainer lead:
4179.1 for Trainer mode operations with the mx-16iFS
in combination with any GRAUPNER transmitter
fitted with a DSC socket.
3290.8 Trainer lead for use with an mx-16iFS Pupil
transmitter and a GRAUPNER Teacher transmitter with opto-electronic Teacher socket.
124 Appendix
Trainer lead,
Order No. 3290.7
S
Pupil transmitter
with DSC socket
mx-12(s), mx-16s/iFS,
mx-22(iFS), mx-24s and – if
fitted with the DSC socket,
Order No. 3290.24 – mc-19(s),
mc-22(s) and mc-24
3290.7 Trainer lead for use with an mx-12, mx-16s/
iFS, mx-22(iFS) and mx-24s Teacher transmitter and a GRAUPNER Pupil transmitter with
opto-electronic Pupil socket.
For more detailed information about the opto-electronic
modules for the Teacher and Pupil transmitters listed
on this page, please refer to the operating instructions
supplied with your transmitter, or the main GRAUPNER
FS catalogue.
Pupil transmitter with Pupil
module, Order No. 3290.3,
3290.10, 3290.33
D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM
6014, mc-10 … mc-24, mx22(iFS), mx-24s
PRX (Power for Receiver)
Order No. 4136
magic box
Order No. 3162
XZ-P1 iFS programming adapter
Order No. 23300
A highly developed, stabilised receiver power supply with intelligent
power management.
This unit guarantees a stabilised, user-variable power supply for the
receiver, with the aim of further enhancing the reliability of the power
supply. It is suitable for use with a wide range of receiver batteries, and
therefore forms a simple means of providing a reliable power supply in
a very wide range of models. If the battery voltage should collapse –
even if only briefly – while the system is operating, the unit stores the
event and indicates it subsequently. The user is therefore warned of an
inadequate or even failing receiver battery, and can implement suitable
counter-measures in good time.
• For use with one or two receiver batteries.
(simultaneous discharging when used with two batteries)
• For use with five-cell or six-cell NiMH batteries or two-cell LiPo or
LiFe batteries. GRAUPNER/JR G3.5, G2 and BEC connectors
• Three user-selectable output voltage levels for powering the receiver (5.1 V / 5.5 V / 5.9 V)
• Two ultra-bright LEDs indicate the operational state of Battery 1 and
Battery 2 separately.
• Integral high-quality On / Off switch.
• Heavy-duty construction for handling high currents.
• Low-profile switch and LEDs, to avoid spoiling the model’s appearance.
• In-line arrangement of mounting lugs, LEDs and switch for simple
installation using the drilling template supplied.
The magic-box opens up a wide range of potential applications to the
demanding RC modeller. The magic-box enables you to distribute one
servo function to a maximum of four servos, speed controllers, etc..
A selector switch is used to select each of the connected servos
individually, after which two buttons are used to program its direction of
rotation, travel, centre and end-points accurately and permanently. At
any time all the settings can be changed and the new settings stored.
If the jumper is connected, power to the magic-box and the servos
connected to it is supplied via the RC system; alternatively an external
battery can be used, connected to the gold-contact socket.
• Centre adjustment, variable by +/-25%.
• End-point adjustment, variable by +/-25% for each servo and each
side of centre.
• Servo travel, variable by +/-50% for each servo.
• Direction of servo rotation, can be reversed separately for each servo.
• Total reset function: resets all settings to the factory default values.
The programming adapter is connected to one of your PC’s USB
sockets using a Mini-USB-B / USB-A connecting lead (standard item
supplied with digital video and stills cameras), and enables the user to
program the settings of Graupner | iFS RF modules or Graupner | iFS
receivers wirelessly, and also to update the firmware of current Graupner | iFS RF modules and Graupner | iFS receivers.
The associated PC software is self-explanatory and easy to use; it can
be downloaded at any time from the iFS website. A graphic 2.4 GHz
band scanner is also available as a useful option for the unit; this gives
a swift overview of the conditions on the band.
Dimensions: 31 x 31 x 13 mm
Appendix 125
Approved transmitter output stages and national receiver settings
In order to fulfil various directives including FCC, ETSI, IC etc., and other statutory regulations valid in individual countries, this radio control system is only approved for use with
the transmitter output stages and national receiver settings stated below. Please observe the legal restrictions which apply to you. It is prohibited to use the radio control system
with settings other than those stated below.
Approved transmitter output stages
The output stages stated in the table below MUST be
observed, otherwise the system will not satisfy the statutory regulations which apply in your country.
Country
Approved settings
North America and
Australia
Hopping mode 1 … 3
Output stages 1 … 5
Japan and Europe
Hopping mode 1:
Output stages 1 … 2
Hopping mode 4 + 5:
Output stages 1 … 5
These settings are carried out using the methods
described in the section starting on page 22.
Approved national receiver settings
The national setting is required in order to fulfil various
directives such as FCC, ETSI, IC etc..
Note:
This setting refers exclusively to Hopping Mode 1; it is
not applicable to any other Hopping Mode.
Country
Setting
All countries except France
1
France
2*
*
Open-air operation. Transmitter output “1” must be selected.
These settings must be carried out using the methods
described in the section starting on page 24, and in the
instructions supplied with the receiver.
Keine Haftung für Druckfehler! Änderungen vorbehalten!
Liability for printing errors excluded! We reserve the right to
introduce modifications!
Nous ne sommes pas responsables d’éventuelles erreurs
d’impression! Sous réserve de modifications!
Nessuna responsabilità per errori di stampa! Ci riserviamo la
facoltà di apportare cambiamenti!
126 Approved transmitter output stages and national receiver settings
XM-J1 IFS, XM-J2 IFS, XM-J3 IFS, XM-J4 IFS,
XM-M1 IFS, XM-M2 IFS, XM-F1 IFS, XM-F2 IFS,
XR-6 IFS, XR-12 IFS, XR-16 IFS, XR-20 IFS, XR-24 IFS,
XD-6 IFS, XZ-P1 IFS, XZ-R1 IFS,
mc-19 IFS, mc-22 IFS, mc-24 IFS, mx-16 IFS, mx-22 IFS
2
Geräteklasse:
V1.7.1
Hans Graupner, Managing Director
Hans Graupner, Geschäftsführer
Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum
§ 3 (2) (Article 3 (2))
Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Frequenzspektrums
§ 3 (2) (Artikel 3 (2))
Protection requirement concernig electromagnetic compatibility
§ 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1. (Article 3 (1) a))
Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1. (Artikel 3 (1)a))
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstraße 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck Germany
Tel: 07021/722-0
Fax: 07021/722-188
EMail: [email protected]
Kirchheim, 07. Juli 2008
EN 300 328
EN 301 489-1 V1.7.1
EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1
EN 60950:2006
Harmonised standards applied
Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:
complies with the essential requirements of § 3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the
R&TTE Directive).
den grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen des
FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.
Equipment class
declares that the product
erklärt, dass das Produkt:
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG
Henriettenstraße 94-96
D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck
Declaration of Conformity in accordiance with the Radio and Telecomunikations Terminal Equipment
Act (FTEG) and Directive 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)
Konformitätserklärung gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und
Telekomunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)
Conformity declaration
Conformity declaration 127
128 For your notes
For your notes 129
130 For your notes
Guarantee certificate
Servicestellen / Service / Service après-vente
Graupner-Zentralservice
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG
Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96
D-73230 Kirchheim
Servicehotline
(+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76*
Montag - Freitag
9:30-11:30 + 13:00-15:00 Uhr
Belgie/Belgique/Nederland
Jan van Mouwerik
Slot de Houvelaan 30
NL 3155 Maasland VT
(+31) 10 59 13 59 4
Luxembourg
Kit Flammang
129, route d’Arlon
L 8009 Strassen
(+35) 23 12 23 2
Ceská Republika
Slovenská Republika
RC Service Z. Hnizdil
Letecka 666/22
CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne
(+42) 2 33 31 30 95
Schweiz
Graupner Service
Wehntalerstrasse 37
CH 8181 Höri
(+41) 43 26 66 58 3
Espana
FA - Sol S.A.
C. Avinyo 4
E 8240 Manresa
(+34) 93 87 34 23 4
Sverige
Baltechno Electronics
Box 5307
S 40227 Göteborg
(+46) 31 70 73 00 0
France
Graupner France
Gérard Altmayer
86, rue St. Antoine
F 57601 Forbach-Oeting
(+33) 3 87 85 62 12
United Kingdom
Graupner Service
Brunel Drive
GB, NEWARK, Nottinghamshire
NG242EG
(+44) 16 36 61 05 39
Italia
GiMax
Via Manzoni, no. 8
I 25064 Gussago
(+39) 030 25 22 73 2
*
0,14 Cent / Minute aus dem
Festnetz der deutschen TCom. Abweichende Preise für
Anrufe aus Mobilfunknetzen
oder aus dem Festnetz
anderer Anbieter möglich.
Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie von
This product is warrantied for
Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de
Die Fa. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße
94-96, 73230 Kirchheim/Teck gewährt ab dem Kaufdatum
auf dieses Produkt eine Garantie von 24 Monaten. Die
Garantie gilt nur für die bereits beim Kauf des Produktes
vorhandenen Material- oder Funktionsmängel. Schäden,
die auf Abnützung, Überlastung, falsches Zubehör oder
unsachgemäße Behandlung zurückzuführen sind, sind von
der Garantie ausgeschlossen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und
Gewährleistunsansprüche des Verbrauchers werden durch
diese Garantie nicht berührt. Bitte überprüfen Sie vor einer
Reklamation oder Rücksendung das Produkt genau auf
Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit die entstandenen
Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen.
Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96. 73230
Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees this product for a
period of 24 months from date of purchase. The guarantee
applies only to such material or operational defects witch
are present at the time of purchase of the product. Damage
due to wear, overloading, incompetent handling or the use
of incorrect accessories is not covered by the guarantee.
The user´s legal rights and claims under guarantee are not
affected by this guarantee. Please check the product carefully for defects before you are make a claim or send the
item to us, since we are obliged to make a charge for our
cost if the product is found to be free of faults.
La société Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße
94-96, 73230 Kirchheim/Teck, Allemagne, accorde sur ce
produit une garantie de 24 mois à partir de la date d´achat.
La garantie prend effet uniquement sur les vices de
fonctionnement et de matériel du produit acheté. Les dommages dûs à de l´usure, à de la surcharge, à de mauvais
accessoires ou à d´une application inadaptée, sont exclus
de la garantie. Cette garantie ne remet pas en cause les
droits et prétentions légaux du consommateur. Avant toute
réclamation et tout retour du produit, veuillez s.v.p. contrôler et noter exactement les défauts ou vices.
24
Monaten
months
mois
Garantie-Urkunde
Warranty certificate / Certificat de garantie
mx-16iFS Set
…
…
Order No. 23000
Order No. 23000.99
Übergabedatum:
Date of purchase/delivery:
Date de remise :
Name des Käufers:
Owner´s name:
Nom de I`acheteur :
Straße, Wohnort:
Complete address:
Domicile :
Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers:
Stamp and signature of dealer:
Cachet de la firme et signature du détaillant :
Guarantee certificate 131
INTELLIGENT-FREQUENCY-SELECT
GRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KG
POSTFACH 1242
D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECK
GERMANY
http://www.graupner.de
Availability and changes to specifications reserved.
Supplied only through approved specialist retail dealers.
We will gladly supply addresses of retailers.
Printed in Germany PN.NC-01
We have checked the information in these instructions with great care and believe it to
be correct. However, we accept no liability of any kind for errors, omissions and printing
errors. GRAUPNER reserves the right to modify the software and hardware features
described in this manual at any time and without prior notification.